617604

Skoda Rapid - 2015 Handleiding

158
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/200
Pagina verder
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠKODA Rapid
Owner's Manual

5JA012720AF
Preface
You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
The description of the vehicle operation, important information about safety, vehicle care, mainte-
nance and self-help, as well as technical vehicle data, are given in this manual.
Please read this Owner's Manual carefully, because operation in accordance with these instructions is
a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter referred to only as ŠKODA or manufacturer)

5JA012720AF
Table of Contents
Board literature 4
Notes 5
Structure and more information about the
Operating Instructions 6
Abbreviations
Safety
Passive Safety 8
General information 8
Correct and safe seated position 9
Seat belts 12
Using seat belts 12
Inertia reels and belt tensioners 15
Airbag system 16
Description of the airbag system 16
Airbag overview 17
Deactivating airbags 20
Transporting children safely 22
Child seat 22
Fastening systems 25
Using the system
Cockpit 29
Overview
28
Instruments and Indicator Lights
30
Instrument cluster
30
Indicator lights
34
Information system
41
Driver information system
41
Multifunction display (MFD)
43
MAXI DOT display 46
Service interval display 47
Unlocking and opening 49
Unlocking and locking 49
Anti-theft alarm system 53
Luggage compartment lid 54
Power windows 55
Mechanical windows 57
Lights and visibility 58
Lights 58
Interior lighting 63
Visibility 64
Windscreen wipers and washers 65
Rear mirror 66
Seats and head restraints 69
Seats and head restraints 69
Seat features 71
Transporting and practical equipment 73
Useful equipment 73
Luggage compartment 80
Roof rack 84
Heating and air conditioning 85
Heating, ventilation, cooling 85
Communication and multimedia 90
Universal telephone installation GSM II 90
Voice control 94
Multimedia 96
SmartGate 98
Driving
Starting-off and Driving 100
Starting and turning off the engine 100
Brakes and parking 102
Manual gear changing and pedals 103
Automatic gearbox 104
Retraction and economical driving 107
Driving through water and driving off of
made-up roads 107
Assist systems 109
Braking and stabilisation systems 109
Parking aid 110
Cruise Control System 111
START-STOP 112
Tyre pressure monitoring 115
Hitch and trailer 116
Hitch 116
Trailer 121
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance 124
Service work, adjustments and technical
alterations 124
Washing vehicle 127
Cleaning vehicle exterior 128
Interior care 132
Inspecting and replenishing 134
Fuel 134
Engine compartment 137
Engine oil 140
Coolant
142
Brake fluid 143
Vehicle battery 144
Wheels 148
Tyres and wheel rims 148
Manufacturer-approved tyre variants 151
Winter operation 152
2
Table of Contents
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help 154
Emergency equipment 154
Reserve and temporary spare wheel 155
Changing a wheel 156
Puncture set 160
Jump-starting 162
Towing the vehicle 164
Remote control 166
Emergency unlocking/locking 166
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 167
Fuses and light bulbs 169
Fuses 169
Replacing bulbs 172
Technical data
Technical data
177
Vehicle data 177
Index
3
Table of Contents
Board literature
You always find these Operating Instructions and the Service Plan in the on-
board literature for your vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, the on-board literature can also contain The ra-
dio instruction manual or Manual of the navigation systemand in some coun-
tries also the brochure On the road.
Owner's Manual
These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and all
related model versions as well as all equipment levels.
This owner's manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in this Owner's Manual.
The level of equipment in your vehicle refers to your purchase contract for the
vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment, please contact a
ŠKODA Partner, if required.
The Pictures in this manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illustrations
can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to provide
general information.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. pursues a policy of constant product and model develop-
ment. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time with regard to
design, equipment and technology. The information listed in this operating
manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press.
It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the technical
data, illustrations and information contained in this Owner's Manual.
Service schedule
The service plan includes the documentation of the vehicle handover informa-
tion with regard to warranty and service events.
The radio instruction manual
The instruction manual of the radio contains a description of the operation of
the radio, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.
Manual of the navigation system
The manual of the navigation system includes a description of the operation of
the navigation system, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.
Move Brochure
The Move brochure contains phone numbers of importers and service offices in
individual countries, together with emergency numbers.
4
Board literature
Notes
Terms used
The on-board literature contains the following terms relating to the service
work for your vehicle.
- Workshop - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks
for ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA Serv-
ice Partner, or an independent workshop.
- A Workshop that has been contractually authorized
by the manufacturer ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to perform
service tasks on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
- A company that has been authorized by the manufacturer
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. or its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and,
when applicable, to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell
ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
Explanation of symbols
An overview of the symbols used in the instruction manual and a brief explan-
ation of their meaning.
Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor-
mation and safety warnings.
Continuation of the module on the next page.
Situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible.
® Trademark.
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display.
Text display in the segment display.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
For the sake of the environment
Texts with this symbol contain information on environmental protection as
well as tips for economical operation.
“Specialist”
“ŠKODA service partner”
“ŠKODA partner”
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
5
Notes
Structure and more information about the Operating
Instructions
Structure of the manual
The operating manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas.
■
Section (e.g. Safety) - the title of the Section is always indicated at the lower
left side
■
Main chapters (e.g. Airbag System) - the title of the main chapter is always
indicated at the lower right side
■
Chapter (e.g. Airbag Overview)
■
Introduction to the topic - Module Overview within the chapter intro-
ductory information about the chapter content, if necessary, valid for
the entire chapter notes
■
Module (e.g. Front Airbags)
Information Search
When searching for information in the operating instructions, we recommend
using the Index at the end of the manual.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Units
The volume, weight, speed and length data are given in metric units, unless
otherwise indicated.
Display
In this owner's manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the dis-
play illustration, provided nothing is otherwise stated.
6
Structure and more information about the Operating Instructions
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition
rpm Engine revolutions per minute
A2DP
a Bluetooth software profile for a one-way transfer of audio
data
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AG Automatic gearbox
AGM Vehicle battery type
TCS Traction control
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
DPF Diesel particle filter
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
EDL Electronic differential lock
ECE Economic Commission for Europe
EPC EPC fault light
ESC Electronic Stability Control
ET Rim depth
EU European Union
GSM Global System for Mobile communications
HBA Hydraulic brake assist
HHC Uphill start assist
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
MDI Inputs for connecting external devices
MFD Multifunction display
MG Manual gearbox
MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection
N1
Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta-
tion of goods
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
PIN personal identification number
SIM card a card for the identification of the mobile network operator
Abbreviation Definition
TDI CR
Diesel engine with turbo charging and common rail injection
system
TSI Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection
VIN Vehicle identification number
Wi-Fi wireless data network
7
Abbreviations
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Before setting off
8
Driving safety 8
Safety equipment 8
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the sub-
ject of passive safety in your vehicle.
We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for ex-
ample, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of children.
WARNING
■
This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for
the driver and his occupants.
■
You can find further information on safety concerning you and those trav-
elling with you in the following chapters of this owner's manual.
■
The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.
Before setting off
Read and observe on page 8 first.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning proper-
ly.
Ensure that the function of the wipers and the condition of the wiper
blades are free of any defects.
Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed.
Ensure that the mirrors are not covered.
Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
Secure all items of luggage.
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle.
Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat
belts » page 22, Transporting children safely.
Adopt the correct seated position » page 9, Correct and safe seated
position. Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position.
Driving safety
Read and observe on page 8 first.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving
safety is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk.
The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g.
by your passengers or mobile phone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. due to medication, al-
cohol or drugs.
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather condi-
tions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys – at least every two hours.
Safety equipment
Read and observe
on page 8 first.
The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle.
›
Three-point seat belts for all the seats.
›
Belt force limiters for the front seats.
›
Belt tensioners for the front seats.
›
Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats.
›
Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger.
›
Side airbags.
8
Safety
›
Head airbags.
›
Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system.
›
Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system.
›
Head restraints adjustable for height
1)
.
›
Adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect
you and those travelling with you in accident situations.
The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if
you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is
not correctly adjusted or used.
If the seat belt is not fastened properly, this may result in injuries if an airbag is
activated in the event of an accident.
Correct and safe seated position
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Correct seated position for the driver
9
Adjusting the steering wheel position 10
Correct seated position for the front passenger 10
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 11
Examples of incorrect seated positions 11
WARNING
■
The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the
body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to
provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.
■
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 22, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
■
If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life-
threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
WARNING (Continued)
■
If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
■
The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury!
Correct seated position for the driver
Fig. 1
The correct distance of the driver
to the steering wheel/correctly
adjusted head restraint
Read and observe on page 9 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance
A
between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 1. Adjust the steering
wheel » page 10, Adjusting the steering wheel position.
Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the top of your head
1)
B
» Fig. 1.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12, Using seat belts.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 69.
1)
Not valid for sport seats.
9
Passive Safety
WARNING
■
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt
the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is
moving.
■
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel. Not maintain-
ing this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able
to properly protect you – hazard!
■
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position. Never hold the steering
wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle or
inner edge of the steering wheel). In such cases, you could severely injure
the arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed.
■
Ensure that there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get
caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking. You would
then no longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 2 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read and observe on page 9 first.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
›
Swing the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 2.
›
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be
adjusted in direction of arrow
2
.
›
Pull the holder until it stops in arrow direction
3
.
WARNING
■
The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving
so that the steering wheel cannot accidentally change position during the
journey – risk of accident!
■
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary!
Correct seated position for the front passenger
Read and observe on page 9 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the top of your head
1)
B
» Fig. 1 on page 9.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12, Using seat belts.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 69.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactiva-
ted » page 20, Deactivating airbags.
WARNING
■
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel. Not maintaining
this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
properly protect you – hazard!
■
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
seated position!
1)
Not valid for sport seats.
10
Safety
Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats
Read and observe on page 9 first.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an
accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.
Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of the head
B
» Fig. 1 on page 9.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 12, Using seat belts.
Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi-
cle » page 22, Transporting children safely.
Adjust the seats and head restraints » page 69.
Examples of incorrect seated positions
Read and observe
on page 9 first.
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened cor-
rectly.
Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the
seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing
of the seat belt.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers, especially children.
Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is
moving.
The following list contains instructions which, if not observed, may cause seri-
ous injuries or death. This list is not complete, however we would like you to
familiarise yourself with this subject.
Observe the following instructions while driving.
Do not stand up.
Do not stand on the seats.
Do not kneel on the seats.
Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back.
Do not lean against the dash panel.
Do not lie on the rear seats.
Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
Do not sit facing to the side.
Do not lean out of the window.
Do not put your feet out of the window.
Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell.
Do not drive without fastening your seat belt.
Do not delay in the luggage compartment.
11
Passive Safety
Seat belts
Using seat belts
Introduction
Fig. 3
Driver wearing seat belt
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The physical principle of a frontal collision 13
Fastening and unfastening seat belts 14
Belt height adjustment on the front seats 15
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated
position » Fig. 3.
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable
extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well re-
sult in severe injuries.
Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the
major benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as
possible by the belts.
The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety meas-
ures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to the kinetic energy being re-
duced as effectively as possible. The energy produced is thus absorbed and
there is less risk of injury.
Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the
vehicle » page 22, Transporting children safely.
WARNING
■
Fasten your seat belt before each journey – even when driving in town!
This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear – risk of injury!
■
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child » page 14, Fastening
and unfastening seat belts.
■
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seat-
ed » page 9, Correct and safe seated position.
■
The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING
Information on the correct routing of the belt
■
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even
in minor accidents.
■
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder – on no ac-
count across your neck.
■
A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
■
The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, bunches of keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
■
The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
■
Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of the safety belts
■
Never use one seat belt to secure two persons (including children). The
seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another
passenger.
12
Safety
WARNING (Continued)
■
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
■
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt
tongue will not lock in place properly.
■
Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
■
It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e. g. for
shortening the belts for smaller persons).
■
The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably
when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 72.
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
■
The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
pair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 134.
■
The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
■
Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage
to the seat belts, seat belt connections, inertia reel or the lock is detected,
the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■
Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced – this is best done by a
specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspec-
ted. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
Note
The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts.
The physical principle of a frontal collision
Fig. 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt/rear seat passenger without a
fastened seat belt
Read and observe on page 12 first.
As soon as the vehicle is moving, so-called kinetic energy (the energy of mo-
tion) is produced both in terms of the car as well as in terms of the occupants.
The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at
which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the
occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the
amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.
The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor. Doubling the speed of
the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four
times.
The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor ac-
cident is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on
the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed of 30-50 km/h, the forces that your body is
exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric ton (1000 kg).
For example, a person's weight of 80 kg “increases” to 4.8 tons (4800 kg) at
50 km/h.
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt
are thrown forward and strike parts of the interior of the car, such as the
steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen in ways which cannot be control-
led » Fig. 4 -
. In certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the
vehicle, which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries.
13
Seat belts
It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts, as they could
otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the
event of an accident.
Rear seat passengers who have not fastened their seat belts are a danger not
only to themselves but also to those seated at the front » Fig. 4 –
.
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Fig. 5 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
Fig. 6 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Rout-
ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
Read and observe on page 12 first.
Fasten
›
Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint
1)
before fastening the seat
belt » page 9.
›
Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis.
›
Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 5 - until it
audibly clicks into place.
›
Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is
easy to get hold of.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must
roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest.
The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis, must not be positioned
across the stomach and must always fit snugly » Fig. 6 -
.
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of
ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child.
With pregnant women, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as
possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo-
men » Fig. 6 -
.
Release
Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary.
›
Press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 5 -
; the lock tongue pops out.
›
Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing,
the seat belt does not twist.
CAUTION
When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not dam-
age the door trim or other parts of the interior.
1)
Not valid for sport seats.
14
Safety
Belt height adjustment on the front seats
Fig. 7
Front seat: Seat belt height ad-
juster
Read and observe on page 12 first.
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the
front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size.
›
Press the seat belt height adjuster and move up or down in the desired di-
rection » Fig. 7.
›
Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place.
Inertia reels and belt tensioners
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Inertia reels
15
Belt tensioners
15
Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel.
The belts also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving
downhill and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat
belts.
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal
collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the
seat belts are not fastened.
The seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a collision of a cer-
tain severity.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side
and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in
which no major forces are produced from the front.
WARNING
■
Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation
of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried
out by a specialist garage.
■
The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci-
dent. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to re-
place the entire system.
Note
■
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
■
When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system, it is im-
portant to comply with national legal requirements. ŠKODA service partners
are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with de-
tailed information.
15
Seat belts
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
System description 16
Airbag deployment 16
WARNING
■
An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a
fastened seat belt.
■
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but instead forms part of
the complete passive vehicle safety concept.
■
To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect
when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be correctly adjusted to
match the body size » page 9, Correct and safe seated position.
■
If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
■
If there is a fault, the airbag system must be checked by a specialist ga-
rage immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activa-
ted in the event of an accident.
■
No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
■
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■
Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork.
■
It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
■
The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one ac-
cident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de-
ployed.
System description
Read and observe on page 16 first.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light
in the instrument cluster » page 39.
When the airbags are deployed, they fill with gas and inflate.
A grey white or red, non-harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated.
This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following modules.
›
Electronic control unit.
›
Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger » page 17.
›
Side airbags » page 18.
›
Head airbags » page 19.
›
Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster » page 39.
›
Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 20.
›
Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation/activation in the
middle of the dash panel » page 20.
Note
■
The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
■
If you sell your vehicle, provide the complete vehicle documentation to the
new owner. Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de-
activating the front passenger airbag must be included!
■
When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to
comply with the national legal requirements.
Airbag deployment
Read and observe
on page 16 first.
The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be
able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident.
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
In certain accident situations, the several airbags may be deployed simultane-
ously.
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions,
rear-end collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover.
16
Safety
Deployment factors
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. An important role is played by factors
such as the type of object that the vehicle hits (hard/soft), the impact angle,
vehicle speed etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which
occurs. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the
relevant restraint system.
If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision
remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit,
the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe dam-
age to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
›
Driver’s front airbag.
›
Front passenger airbag.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision.
›
Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
›
Head airbags on the side of the accident.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
›
The interior lighting illuminates (if the switch for the interior light is in the
door contact position).
›
The hazard warning lights are switched on.
›
All the doors are unlocked.
›
The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Airbag overview
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front airbags
17
Side airbags 18
Head airbags 19
Front airbags
Fig. 8 Locations of the airbags / gas filled airbags
Fig. 9
Safe distance to steering wheel
In the event of a severe frontal collision, the front airbag system offers addi-
tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger.
The driver's front airbag is located in the steering wheel, the front passenger
airbag is located in the instrument panel above the glove compartment » Fig. 8
-
.
The airbags inflate in front of the driver and front passenger when they are
deployed » Fig. 8 -
. The forward movement of the driver and of the front
passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
17
Airbag system
WARNING
Information on correct seated position
■
For the driver and front passenger, it is important to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard
A
» Fig. 9. Not
maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will
not be able to properly protect you – hazard! The front seats and the head
restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of
the occupant.
■
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to
injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct.
■
There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
WARNING
Front airbag and transporting children
■
Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
■
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Deactivating airbags. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child
on the front passenger seat, pay attention to any relevant national regula-
tions regarding the use of child safety seats.
WARNING
General information
■
The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash pan-
el on the passenger side must not have stickers attached, be covered or
modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth
that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects such as cup hold-
ers, mobile phone mounts, etc. must be attached to the covers of the air-
bag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity.
■
Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module
in the dash panel.
Note
■
In vehicles with head airbags, the lettering  can be seen on the steering
wheel.
■
In vehicles with front passenger airbags, the lettering

is located on the
dash panel on the passenger side.
Side airbags
Fig. 10 Location of the side airbag in the driver's seat/gas-filled side air-
bag
In the event of severe side collisions, the side airbag system provides addition-
al protection for the upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of passengers in
the vehicle.
The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the front seat backr-
ests » Fig. 10 -
.
When the side airbags » Fig. 10 -
are deployed, the head airbag and belt ten-
sioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated
airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pel-
vis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
WARNING
Information on correct seated position
■
Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This ap-
plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable
child safety seat » page 24, Child safety and side airbag.
18
Safety
WARNING (Continued)
■
There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accesso-
ries, such as cup holders, should be attached to the doors.
■
If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
can result in serious injuries » page 22, Child seat.
WARNING
■
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing.
■
Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
■
Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro-
tective function of the side airbag.
■
Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag mod-
ule must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
■
The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage,
cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open
the modules.
Note
In vehicles with side airbags a label with the lettering  is located on the
front seat backrests.
Head airbags
Fig. 11 Location of the head airbag/gas-filled head airbag
In the event of a severe side collision, the head airbag system offers additional
protection for the head and neck area of passengers.
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides of the vehicle
interior » Fig. 11 -
.
In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the
relevant side airbag and the front seat belt tensioner on the side of the car on
which the accident occurs.
When deployed, the airbag covers the window area of the front and rear doors,
as well as the area of the door pillar » Fig. 11 -
.
Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag. The re-
duction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any move-
ments of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area.
WARNING
■
There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head air-
bags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
■
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing. Additionally, clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items
of clothing.
19
Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
■
The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head
airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in
the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated,
parts of the accessories fitted could be thrown into the interior of the car
and injure the occupants » page 124.
■
The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the
deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens,
etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if
the head airbag is deployed.
■
There must not be any further persons, animals or objects positioned be-
tween the seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. In ad-
dition, none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window
when driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.
Note
In vehicles with head airbags, the lettering  can be seen on the B column
cladding.
Deactivating airbags
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Deactivating airbags 20
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 20
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below.
›
If using a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat (due to different
legal regulations, the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards-facing
child seat in some countries) » page 22, Transporting children safely.
›
If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the mid-
dle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly
adjusted.
›
If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
of a physical disability.
›
If different seats have been fitted (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side air-
bags).
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated
switch » page 20.
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags.
Monitoring the airbag system
The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically, in-
cluding when one of the airbags is switched off.
Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment
›
The warning light
lights up for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds.
Front passenger airbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage com-
partment
›
The warning light
lights up for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition
is switched on.
›
The warning light

» Fig. 12 on page 20 -
comes on after the ignition
has been switched on.
Note
■
The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed.
■
A ŠKODA service partner will be able to inform you which, if any, of your vehi-
cle's airbags can or must be deactivated.
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Fig. 12 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation
Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch.
20
Safety
Switching off
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
›
Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
›
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
›
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position

» Fig. 12 -
.
›
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
›
Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
›
Check that the warning light

1)
under the text



» Fig. 12-
lights up after the ignition is switched on.
Switching on
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
›
Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » .
›
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
›
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position

» Fig. 12 -
.
›
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
›
Close the storage box on the front passenger's side.
›
Check that the warning light

under the text



» Fig. 12-
does not light up after the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
■
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
■
Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
■
If the

warning light is flashing, the front passenger airbag will not
be deployed in an accident! Have the airbag system checked by a specialist
garage immediately.
■
The key cannot be inserted in the key switch while driving.
■
Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag!
■
The airbag could be triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result
in injury or death!
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
1)
The warning light  comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on, goes out for about
1 second and then comes on again.
21
Airbag system
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 23
Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat 24
Child safety and side airbag 24
Classification of child seats 24
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 24
Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger
seat.
In contrast to adults, the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet
fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory pro-
visions.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 standard must be used. ECE-R stands
for: Economic Commission for Europe – Regulation.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number
below.
WARNING
■
The national legal requirements must be observed when using child
seats.
■
One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
■
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Certain outside climatic
conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.
■
The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
WARNING (Continued)
■
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
■
Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
■
Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
■
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat. Further information » page 23, Use
of a child seat on the front passenger seat.
CAUTION
■
When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the head
restraints so that they are as high as possible.
■
If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in
the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 70. After remov-
ing the child seat, reinstall the head restraints.
Note
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
22
Safety
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
Does not apply to Taiwan
Fig. 13
Sticker on the B column on the
front passenger side.
Fig. 14
Front passenger sun visor / label
Read and observe and on page 22 first.
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protec-
ted by an active airbag installed in front of it. This could cause serious injury
to the child, even death.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you install child seats on the rear
seats whenever possible.
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
›
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child
seat » .
›
If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
›
If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con-
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
›
With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
›
Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
›
Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
›
Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac-
cording to the specifications in the manufacturer's user manual of the child
seat .
WARNING
■
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Deactivating airbags.
■
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■
This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found in one of the fol-
lowing locations.
■
On the B-column on the front passenger side » Fig. 13. The sticker is
visible upon opening the front passenger door.
■
On the front passenger's sun visor. In some countries, the sticker is lo-
cated on the front seat passenger's sun visor » Fig. 14.
■
With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3, make sure that the loop-around
fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at
the same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passen-
ger side.
■
As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer being used on the pas-
senger seat, the front passenger airbag should be re-activated again.
23
Transporting children safely
Use of the child seat in the front passenger seat
Applies to Taiwan
Fig. 15 Front passenger sun visor / label
Read and observe and on page 22 first.
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat.
This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found on the passenger's
sun visor » Fig. 15.
Child safety and side airbag
Fig. 16
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly secured
– risk from the side airbag/Child
properly protected by safety seat
Read and observe
and on page 22 first.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side air-
bag » Fig. 16 -
.
There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
the side airbag to ensure that the airbag can provide as much protection as
possible » Fig. 16 -
.
WARNING
■
Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of
the side airbag – risk of injury!
■
Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags –
risk of injury!
Classification of child seats
Read and observe and on page 22 first.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group Weight of the child Approximate age
0 up to 10 kg up to 9 months
0+ up to 13 kg up to 18 months
1 9 - 18 kg up to 4 years
2 15 - 25 kg up to 7 years
3 22 - 36 kg over 7 years
Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt
Read and observe
and on page 22 first.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of
the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
external
Rear seat
Center
0
up to 10 kg
U U U
0+
up to 13 kg
U U U
1
9 - 18 kg
U U U
2
15 - 25 kg
U U U
3
22 - 36 kg
U U U
24
Safety
“Universal” child seat category - a child seat designed to be attached to
the seat using the seat belt.
Fastening systems
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attachment points of the

-system 25
Use of child seats with the

-system 25
Attachment points of the


-system 26
Attachment points of the

-system
Fig. 17
Labels on the ISOFIX system
U  represents a system for a fast and secure child seat mounting.
There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seats for fixing the child
seat in place, using the

-system. The places are marked with labels with
the

logo » Fig. 17.
WARNING
■
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the -system.
■
Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the

-system – risk
of death!
Note
■
A child seat fitted with the -system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with an -system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■
Child seats with the

-system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories.
Use of child seats with the -system
Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the -system on
each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class of
the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
0
up to 10 kg
E X IL-SU X
0+
up to 13 kg
E
X IL-SU XD
C
25
Transporting children safely
Group
Size class of
the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
1
9 - 18 kg
D
X
IL-SU
IUF
X
C
B
B1
A
2
15 - 25 kg
X IL-SU X
3
22 - 36 kg
X IL-SU X
a)
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
The seat is suited for installation of a -child seat with the “Semi-
Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child
seat with the

-system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list
of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
The seat is suitable for the installation of a

-child seat with the ap-
proval “Universal” and attachment with the


-system belt.
The seat is not fitted with

-system attachment points.
Attachment points of the


-system
Fig. 18
Anchor eyelets on the TOP
TETHER system


represents a fastening system, which restricts movements of the up-
per part of the child seat.
The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the


-sys-
tem are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » Fig. 18.
IL-SU
IUF
X
WARNING
■
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  -system.
■
Only use child seats with the


-system on the seats with the lock-
ing eyes.
■
Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
■
On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.
26
Safety
27
Transporting children safely
Fig. 19 Cockpit
28
Using the system
Using the system
Cockpit
Overview
Electrical power windows 56
Door opening lever 51
Electric exterior mirror adjustment 68
Air outlet vents 86
Parking ticket holder 74
Operating lever:
›
Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight
flasher 60
›
Speed regulating system 111
Steering wheel:
›
With horn
›
With driver’s front airbag 17
›
with pushbuttons for radio, navigation system and mobile
phone 90
›
With buttons for the operation of the information system 41
Instrument cluster 30
Operating lever:
›
Windscreen wiper and wash system 66
›
Information system 41
Depending on equipment fitted:
›
Radio
›
Navigation system
Button for hazard warning light system 62
Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag 20
Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel 86
Interior rear-view mirror 67
Key switch for switching off the passenger airbag (in front pas-
senger storage compartment) 20
Front passenger airbag 17
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 78
Air outlet vents 86
Power window in the front passenger door 55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Door opening lever 51
Light switch 58
Headlight range control (in the dashboard) 59
Bonnet release lever 138
Fuse box in the dashboard 169
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 10
Ignition lock 101
Pedals 104
Storage compartment 74
Handbrake lever 103
Depending on equipment fitted:
›
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) 104
›
Selector lever (automatic gearbox) 105
Depending on equipment fitted:
›
Cup holder 74
›
Multimedia holder 77
›
Ashtrays 76
Multi-Device Interface (MDI) input 97
Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
›
Seat heater on the front left seat 71
›
stabilization control (ESC) 109
›
Central locking system 52
›
Rear window heater 64
›
START STOP 112
›
Seat heater on the front right seat 71
Depending on equipment fitted:
›
Operating controls for the heating 87
›
Operating controls for the air conditioning system
88
›
Operating controls for Climatronic
88
Note
The position of some of the controls on right-hand drive models may differ
from that shown in » Fig. 19. The symbols on the controls and switches are the
same as for left-hand drive models.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
29
Cockpit
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Instrument cluster
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview 30
Revolution counter 31
Display 31
Speedometer 31
Coolant temperature gauge 32
Fuel gauge 32
Counter for distance driven 33
33
Display of the second speed 33
Auto Check Control 33
The instrument cluster gives the driver basic information such as the current
speed, engine speed, the state of some vehicle systems and the like.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument cluster, the Error message will appear in
the display.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully re-
sponsible for road safety.
Note
When the ignition is on, the instrument cluster is illuminated
1)
. The brightness
level is automatically adjusted depending on the ambient lighting.
Overview
Fig. 20 Instrument cluster - Version 1
Fig. 21 Instrument cluster - Version 2
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Engine revolutions counter » page 31
›
with warning lights » page 34
Display » page 31
1
2
1)
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster - Version 1.
30
Using the system
Speedometer » page 31
›
with warning lights » page 34
Button for display mode:
›
Time settings » page 33
›
Enable/disable the display of the second speed
1)
» page 33
›
Service intervals - Display of the number of days and kilometres remain-
ing until the next service
1)
» page 47
Button for:
›
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 33
›
Setting the time
›
enable / disable the mode selected by means of the
5
key
Coolant temperature gauge
2)
» page 32
Fuel gauge
2)
» page 32
Revolution counter
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The tachometer
1
» Fig. 20 on page 30 or » Fig. 21 on page 30 shows the ac-
tual engine speed per minute.
The beginning of the red scale range of the tachometer indicates the maxi-
mum permitted engine speed of a driven-in and operating warm engine.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 43.
CAUTION
The pointer of the tachometer must reach the red area for only a short time -
there is a risk of engine damage!
3
4
5
6
7
Display
Fig. 22
Display types
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Display types » Fig. 22
MAXI DOT display.
Segment display
The following information will be displayed.
›
Fuel gauge
3)
» page 32
›
Distance travelled » page 33
›
Time » page 33
›
Details of the information system » page 41
›
Details of the service interval display » page 47
CAUTION
Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display (e.g. when clean-
ing) to prevent any possible damage.
Speedometer
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The speedometer
3
» Fig. 20 on page 30or » Fig. 21 on page 30 displays the
current speed.
1)
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster - Version 2.
2)
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster - Version 1.
3)
Applies only to the segment display (instrument cluster - version 2).
31
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Warning at excessive speeds
An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/
h
1)
. The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls be-
low 120 km/h.
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 23
Coolant temperature gauge
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster - Version 1 » Fig. 20 on page 30.
The display » Fig. 23 provides information on the engine coolant temperature.
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.
In vehicles with the instrument cluster - version 2, » Fig. 21 on page 30 the
coolant temperature is indicated only by one of the warning lights » page 36,
Coolant coming on or going off.
Cold range
If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds, full throttle
and high engine loads. This prevents possible damage to the engine.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer
moves into the middle of the scale
A
» Fig. 23. At very high ambient tempera-
tures or heavy engine loads, the pointer may move even further to the right.
High temperature range
If the pointer reaches the red area of the scale, the coolant temperature is too
high. Further information » page 36,
Coolant.
CAUTION
■
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■
Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 24 Fuel gauge
Read and observe on page 30 first.
The display provides information on the fuel level in the container.
Fuel gauge types » Fig. 24
Display in the instrument cluster - Version 1
In the display of the instrument cluster - Version 2
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres.
The warning light lights up when the amount of fuel reaches the reserve
zone
» page 39.
The reserve zone is indicated by the red area of the scale» Fig. 24 -
or by
displaying only the last two segments of the scale » Fig. 24 -
in the magnify-
ing glass.
1)
This function only applies to certain countries.
32
Using the system
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.
Note
■
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous
curves, braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indi-
cates approx. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the
fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again. This is not a fault.
■
The arrow
next to the icon
within the fuel gauge displays the installation
location of the fuel filler on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Counter for distance driven
Fig. 25
Display: MAXI DOT display / Seg-
ment display
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Display » Fig. 25
Counter for distance travelled (trip)
Odometer
Counter for distance travelled (trip)
The daily trip counter shows the distance driven since the time the counter
was last reset - in steps of 0.1 km.
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
›
Press and hold the
5
» Fig. 20 on page 30 or » Fig. 21 on page 30 button.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance which the vehicle has been driven.
A
B
Note
If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display, this
speed will be shown instead of the odometer.
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Use buttons
4
and
5
» Fig. 20 on page 30 or » Fig. 21 on page 30 to set the
time.
The choice to change the display (hours or minutes).
The change of the displayed value.
In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display, it is also possible to set the
Time in the Time menu » page 47.
Display of the second speed
Read and observe
on page 30 first.
The display can show the current speed in mph
1)
.
This feature is provided for driving in countries with different speed units.
MAXI DOT display.
The display of the second speed can be set in the Alt. speed dis. menu
item » page 47, Settings.
Segment display
›
Press button
4
» Fig. 20 on page 30 or » Fig. 21 on page 30repeatedly, until
the odometer display flashes » page 33.
›
Press button
5
while the display is flashing.
The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer.
The display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way.
Auto Check Control
Read and observe on page 30 first.
Vehicle condition
Certain functions and vehicle systems are checked continuously when the igni-
tion is switched on.
4
5
1)
For models with the speedometer in mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
33
Instruments and Indicator Lights
Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT
display. The messages are displayed simultaneously with the icons in the MAXI
DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster » page 34,
Indicator lights.
The menu item Vehicle status is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT
display whenever at least one fault message exists. After selecting this menu,
the first of the error messages is displayed.
If there are several error messages, the display will show 1/3, for example, be-
low the message. This indicates that the first of a total of three error messag-
es is being displayed.
Warning symbols in the MAXI DOT display
Engine oil pressure too low » page 36
Check engine oil level,
engine oil sensor defective
» page 36
Problem with the engine oil pressure » page 34
Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are
too hot
» page 34
Problem with the engine oil pressure
If the
symbol is shown in the MAXI DOT display, you must have your vehicle
checked immediately by a specialist garage. The information about the maxi-
mum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol.
Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot
A
symbol in the MAXI DOT display indicates that the temperature of the au-
tomatic gearbox DSG clutches is too high.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's manual!
do not continue to drive! Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and wait
until the
icon goes out – risk of gearbox damage! You can continue your
journey as soon as the symbol disappears.
WARNING
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning lights » page 62. The warning triangle must be set up at the pre-
scribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing so.
Note
■
If the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages, these messages must be
confirmed in order to access the main menu » page 42, Using the information
system .
■
As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always in-
dicated again. After they are displayed for the first time, the symbols continue
to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver.
Indicator lights
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Handbrake 35
Brake system 35
Seat belt warning light 35
Generator 35
Door open 36
Engine oil 36
Coolant 36
Power steering 37
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 37
Traction Control System (ASR) 37
Antilock brake system (ABS) 37
Rear fog light 38
Lamp failure 38
Exhaust inspection system 38
Glow plug system (diesel engine) 38

Engine performance check (petrol engine) 38
Diesel particulate filter (Diesel motor) 38
Fuel reserve 39
Airbag system 39
34
Using the system
Tyre inflation pressure 40
Windscreen washer fluid level 40
Turn signal system 40
Fog lights 40
Cruise control system 41
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) 41
Main beam
41
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
tion test.
If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go out a few
seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
WARNING
■
Ignoring illuminated indicator lights and related messages or instructions
in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or
damage to the vehicle.
■
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning lights » page 62. The warning triangle must be set up at the pre-
scribed distance - observe the national legal provisions when doing so.
■
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 137, Engine compartment.
Handbrake
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if the handbrake is applied.
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h for at least
3 seconds while the handbrake is applied.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Release parking brake!
Brake system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The indicator light
illuminates if the brake fluid level in the braking system
is too low or there is a fault in the ABS.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Brake fluid: Owner's manual!
›
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake flu-
id » page 144 » .
WARNING
■
If the warning light together with the warning light » page 37,
Antilock brake system (ABS) illuminates, do not continue to drive!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
■
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
Seat belt warning light
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates as a reminder for the driver and front passen-
ger to fasten seat belts.
The indicator light
goes off after the respective seat belt has been fastened.
If the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle
speed is more than 20 km/h, the warning light
flashes and you will hear an
acoustic signal.
The warning signal is switched off and the indicator light
is permanently lit
if the driver and front passenger have not fastened their seat belts within the
next 90 seconds.
Generator
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
lights up when the engine is running, the vehicle battery
is not being charged.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
35
Instruments and Indicator Lights
CAUTION
If in addition to the warning light the warning light » page 36lights up
while driving, stop driving - there is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the
engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Door open
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The indicator light
illuminates if one or several doors or luggage compart-
ment lid are opened.
Engine oil
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
flashes (low oil pressure)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Oil pressure: Engine off! Owner's manual!
›
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil lev-
el » page 141.
›
If the oil pressure is too low, top up the engine oil » page 142.
If the oil level is within the specified range and the warning light
flashes
again after the engine is started, do not continue driving!
Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
The indicator light
lights up (oil quantity too low)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Check oil level!
›
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil lev-
el » page 141.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
onds
. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on
again after driving about 100 km.
The indicator light
flashes (engine oil level sensor faulty)
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Oil sensor: Workshop!
If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, the warning light flashes several
times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
Stop driving if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil un-
der the current conditions. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a
specialist garage.
Coolant
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The
indicator light remains illuminated until the engine reaches operating
temperature
1)
. Avoid high speeds, full throttle and high engine loads.
If the warning light
lights up or flashes, either the coolant temperature is
too high or the coolant level is too low.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Check coolant! Owner's manual!
›
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and check the coolant lev-
el » page 143.
›
If the coolant level is too low, add coolant to the reservoir » page 143.
If the indicator light
does not illuminate after adding coolant and switching
on the ignition, you may continue your journey.
If the coolant is within the specified range and the warning light
is still lit
after switching on the ignition, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling
fan.
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary » page 171, Fuses in
the engine compartment.
If the coolant level and fan fuse are OK and the warning light
lights up again
after switching on the ignition,
do not continue driving!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
1)
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster - Version 2.
36
Using the system
WARNING
■
Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot, the cool-
ing system is pressurized – risk of scalding! It is therefore best to allow the
engine to cool down before removing the cap.
■
Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may switch itself on auto-
matically even if the ignition is off - a danger of injury is present!
CAUTION
■
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■
Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Power steering
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the indicator light
is illuminated, there is a fault in the power steering sys-
tem.
The power steering operates with reduced steering assist or does not function
at all.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
flashes to show that the ESC is currently operating.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the ESC.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Error: stabilization control (ESC)
or
Error: Traction control (TCS)
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
If the warning light
illuminates immediately after you start the engine, the
ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons.
›
Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on,
the ESR is fully functional again.
Further information » page 109, Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
Note
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the warn-
ing light comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light does
not go out after moving a short distance, this means that there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Traction Control System (ASR)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light flashes
to show that the ASR is currently operating.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the ASR.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Error: Traction control (TCS)
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
If the warning light
illuminates immediately after you start the engine, the
ASR might be switched off due to technical reasons.
›
Switch the ignition off and on again.
The ASR is fully functional again if the
warning light no longer illuminates
after you switch the engine back on.
Further information » page 109, Traction Control System (TCS).
Note
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the warn-
ing light comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light does
not go out after moving a short distance, this means that there is an error in
the system. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the ABS.
37
Instruments and Indicator Lights
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Error: ABS
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
In the event of an ABS fault, the other braking and stabilization systems are
turned off » page 109, Braking and stabilisation systems .
WARNING
■
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
■
If the warning light
together with the warning light
» page 35,
Brake system illuminates,
do not continue to drive! Seek help from a
specialist garage.
Rear fog light
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the rear fog light is switched on.
Lamp failure
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates if a lamp is faulty or if an external vehicle lamp
is faulty .
The indicator light
illuminates within a few seconds after switching on the
ignition or when a light with a faulty lamp is switched on.
The following message, for example, may be shown in the MAXI DOT display.
INFORMATION Check front right low beam!
The rear side lights and the licence plate lighting have several light bulbs. The
indicator light
only lights up if all bulbs in the parking light (in one rear light)
or the licence plate lighting are faulty
1)
. For this reason, regular check that
these light bulbs are working correctly.
Exhaust inspection system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the exhaust inspection
system. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Once
the light has gone out, the engine can be started immediately.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light
does not come
on at all or lights up continuously.
If the warning light
begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine
control. The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.

Engine performance check (petrol engine)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the indicator light

illuminates, there is a fault in the engine control. The
system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Diesel particulate filter (Diesel motor)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The
soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a
regular basis.
If the indicator light
illuminates, soot has accumulated in the filter.
1)
Applies to vehicles with START-STOP system.
38
Using the system
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light goes out.
4th or 5th gear selected (automatic transmission: position S).
Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
Engine speed between 1800-2500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning icon
goes out.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light
does not go out and
the warning light
begins to flash.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Diesel particulate filter: Owner's manual!
The system allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode. After switching the
ignition off and on again the indicator light, the indicator light
also illumi-
nates.
Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
■
The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact
with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled
fuel or such like.
■
Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic condi-
tions. The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt
you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic.
CAUTION
■
As long as the warning light lights up, one must take into account an in-
creased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of
the engine.
■
Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the
service life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA Partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content.
Note
■
To assist the combustion process of the soot particles in the filter, we recom-
mend that regularly driving short distances be avoided.
■
If the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after-
wards, the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes.
Fuel reserve
Read and observe on page 35 first.
When the warning light
is illuminated, this means there is a fuel reserve of
under around 7 litres left.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Please refuel. Range: ... km
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en-
gine and the exhaust system.
Note
The text in the display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short dis-
tance.
Airbag system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates, there is a fault in the airbag system.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Error: Airbag
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored automatically even if one
of the airbags is switched off.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
›
The indicator light
illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition has
been switched on;
›
The warning light

in the display




in the middle of the
dash panel lights up after switching on the ignition » Fig. 12 on page 20.
One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
tool
›
The warning light
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after switching on the
ignition and then flashes again for approx. 12 seconds afterwards.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Airbag / belt tensioner deactivated.
39
Instruments and Indicator Lights
WARNING
When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
checked immediately by a specialized company.
Tyre inflation pressure
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
is illuminated
If the warning light
illuminates while driving, it means one of the tyres has
undergone a pressure change.
An audible signal sounds as a warning signal.
›
Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.
›
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 149.
›
Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the affected
wheel » page 156 or use the repair kit » page 160.
›
Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 115.
The indicator light
flashes for about 1 min. and remains lit
If the warning light
flashes for approximately 1 minute and stays on, there
may be a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system.
›
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light
flashes again after the engine has started, there is a
system error.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The following reasons can explain the warning light
being illuminated.
›
The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute loads as evenly as possible.
›
The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
›
Snow chains are mounted.
›
A wheel has been changed.
Store the tyre pressure values in the system » page 115.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does
not light up at all.
Note
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, the warn-
ing light comes on after switching on the ignition. If the warning light does
not go out after moving a short distance, this means that there is an error in
the system. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Windscreen washer fluid level
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low, the warning light
illumi-
nates.
The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Top up wash fluid!
Top up with liquid » page 139, Windscreen washer system.
Turn signal system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
Either the left
or the right
warning light flashes depending on the position
of the turn signal lever.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
its normal rate.
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of
the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
Fog lights
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the fog lights are operating.
40
Using the system
Cruise control system
Read and observe on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the cruise control is active » page 111.
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Read and observe on page 35 first.
If the warning light
illuminates, operate the brake pedal.
Main beam
Read and observe
on page 35 first.
The warning light
illuminates when the main beam or the headlight flasher
is operated.
Information system
Driver information system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Using the information system 42
Display a low temperature 42
Gear recommendation 43
Door, boot or engine compartment warning 43
The information system provides the driver with alerts and messages about in-
dividual vehicle systems.
This information and advice is shown in the instrument cluster display or indi-
cated by the illumination of the corresponding indicator light in the instrument
cluster.
The information system provides the following information and instructions
(depending on vehicle equipment).
›
Data relating to the multi-function display (MFD) » page 43.
›
Data relating to the MAXI DOT display » page 46.
›
Service interval display » page 47.
›
Auto Check Control » page 33.
›
Selector lever positions for an automatic gearbox » page 105.
WARNING
Concentrate fully on your driving at all times! As the driver, you are fully re-
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
41
Information system
Using the information system
Fig. 26 Buttons/wheel: on the operating lever or the multifunction steer-
ing wheel
Read and observe
on page 41 first.
Some functions of the information system can be operated using the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 26.
Description of the operation
Button/
wheel
Action Operation
A
Briefly press at the top
or below for a longer
time
Select data / set data values
Press top
or below for a longer
time
Display main menu of the
MAXI DOT display » page 46
B
Press briefly View information / confirm specification
C
Press briefly
To go up one level in the menu of the
MAXI DOT display » page 46
Press and hold button
Display main menu of the
MAXI DOT display » page 46
D
Turn upwards or down-
wards
Select data / set data values
Press briefly View information / confirm specification
Display a low temperature
Read and observe on page 41 first.
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the following
icon appears on the display in front of the temperature display
. An audible
signal is emitted.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,
the
icon appears immediately.
Prompt in the segment display
1)
If the outside temperature while driving drops to below +4°C, the temperature
display » page 45, Outside temperature will show up with the following icon
in front
. An audible signal is emitted.
If the outside temperature is already below +4°C when turning the ignition on,
the temperature display and the
icon appear immediately.
After pressing button
A
» Fig. 26 on page 42, the most recently displayed da-
ta is shown.
WARNING
Even at outside temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be present
on the road surface! You should therefore not rely solely on the outside
temperature display for an indication of whether there is black ice on the
road.
1)
Applies to vehicles with the multifunction display (MFA).
42
Using the system
Gear recommendation
Fig. 27
Information on the selected
gear / Gear recommendation
Read and observe on page 41 first.
The function of the gear recommendation is to help reduce fuel consumption.
A suitable gear is engaged, if necessary, a recommendation to shift to high or
lower gear is displayed.
Display » Fig. 27
Optimal gear engaged
Recommended gear
Recommended gear
The gear recommendation is intended only for vehicles with a manual trans-
mission or for vehicles with an automatic transmission in manual shift mode
(Tiptronic).
The recommended
1)
gear and the arrow icon
2)
is displayed.
›
- Recommends that you shift to a higher gear
›
- Recommends that you shift to a lower gear
If for example
is shown in the display with vehicles that have manual gear-
boxes this indicates that it is better to shift from a lower gear to the 4th gear.
If for example
is shown in the display with vehicles that have automatic
gearboxes and are in the manual switching mode (Tiptronic), this indicates
that it is better to shift from the 4th gear to a higher gear.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations, such as overtaking.
For the sake of the environment
A suitably selected gear has the following advantages.
■
It helps to reduce fuel consumption.
■
It reduces the operating noise.
■
It protects the environment.
■
It benefits the durability and reliability of the engine.
Door, boot or engine compartment warning
Read and observe
on page 41 first.
Vehicles with a MAXI DOT display
If at least one door, the boot or bonnet is open, the display indicates the rele-
vant open door, boot or bonnet vehicle icon.
Vehicles with a segment display
If at least one door or the tailgate is open, the
warning light in the instru-
ment cluster lights up » page 36.
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
Multifunction display (MFD)
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Memory 44
Information overview
45
Warning at excessive speeds
46
The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display.
1)
With vehicles that have an automatic gearbox and in the manual switching mode (Tiptronic) the current-
ly engaged gear is shown.
2)
For vehicles with segment display the arrow is displayed behind the gear indication.
43
Information system
The multifunction display only operates when the ignition is switched on. After
the ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before switch-
ing off the ignition is displayed.
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, the menu item MFD must be selected
and confirmed in the main menu » page 46, MAXI DOT display.
On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, there is an option to fade out some of
the information » page 47, Settings.
WARNING
■
Concentrate fully on your driving at all times! As the driver, you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
■
Even at outside temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be
present on the road surface! You should therefore not rely solely on the
outside temperature display for an indication of whether there is black ice
on the road.
Note
■
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
measures.
■
If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is
not indicated in km/h on the display.
■
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
Memory
Fig. 28
Multi-function display - memory display
Read and observe on page 44 first.
In memory the values of elements of the multifunction display(e.g. average
fuel consumption) are recorded.
The multifunction display is equipped with two memories, 1 and 2.
Display of the selected memory in the display at the position
A
» Fig. 28
Single-trip memory
Total trip memory
Select memory
›
Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 45,
Information overview.
›
Confirm details again to select the desired memory.
Reseting
›
Select the corresponding element of the multifunction display » page 45,
Information overview.
›
Select the desired memory.
›
Press and hold to confirm the selected memory.
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the
ignition is switched on until it is switched off.
New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if
the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total-trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up
to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1 999 kilometres driven (
), and a total
of 99 hours and 59 minutes or 9 999 kilometres driven (
).
The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calcula-
tion starts all over again.
Unlike the single-trip memory, the total-trip memory is not deleted after a pe-
riod of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
The following values of the selected memory are set to zero.
›
Average fuel consumption.
›
Distance driven.
›
Average speed.
›
Driving time.
Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
44
Using the system
Information overview
Read and observe on page 44 first.
The information overview of the Multifunction Display (the number of items
displayed is different depending on equipment).
Outside temperature
The current outside temperature is displayed.
For vehicles with a MAXI DOT display this information is always shown.
Driving time
The time travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time,
reset the memory to zero at that point in time » page 44, Memory.
The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes (
)
and 99 hours and 59 minutes (
). The indicator is set back to zero if this period
is exceeded.
Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres/100 km
1)
. You can use
this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
speed
2)
.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed
in litres/100 km
1)
.
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of
time, you must set the memory at the start of the new measurement to
zero » page 44, Memory. After erasing the memory, no value is displayed until
you have driven approx. 300 m.
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
Range
The range indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on
the level of fuel in the tank and with the same style of driving as before.
The display is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light
the display is shown in steps of 5 km.
The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate the information.
The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner.
If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), a fuel consump-
tion of 10 l./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is updated
according to the style of driving.
Distance travelled
The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed.
If you want to measure the distance travelled from a particular moment in
time, reset the memory to zero at that moment in time » page 44, Memory.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km. (
) and
9 999 km (
). The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded.
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km/hour .
To determine the average speed over a certain period of time, set the memory
to zero at the start of the measurement » page 44, Memory.
After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m driven.
The display is updated regularly while you are driving.
Current driving speed
The current speed displayed is identical to the display on the speedometer
3
» Fig. 20 on page 30.
Oil temperature
If the engine oil temperature is in the range of 80-110 °C, the engine operating
temperature has been reached.
If the oil temperature is lower than 80 °C or above 110 °C, avoid high engine
revs, full throttle and high engine loads.
If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for check-
ing the oil temperature is present,
.
symbols are displayed instead of the oil
temperature.
1)
On some models in certain countries, the display appears in kilometres/litre.
2)
On some models in certain countries, – -.- km/ltr. is displayed when the vehicle is stationary.
45
Information system
Warning at excessive speeds
Set the speed limit, e.g. for the maximum permissible speed in urban
areas » page 46, Warning at excessive speeds.
Warning at excessive speeds
Read and observe on page 44 first.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
›
Select the menu item Speed warning (
) or
(
).
›
Activate the speed limit option by confirming this menu item
1)
.
›
Set the desired speed limit, e.g. 50 km/h.
›
Store the speed limit by confirming the set value, or wait several seconds;
your settings will be saved automatically.
The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km/h to 250 km/h in 5 km/h incre-
ments.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
›
Select the menu item Speed warning (
) or
(
).
›
Drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h.
›
Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
If you wish to adjust the set speed limit, you can do so in 5 km/h intervals (e.g.
the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45 km/h).
›
Store the speed limit, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved au-
tomatically.
Change or disable speed limit
›
Select the menu item Speed warning (
) or
(
).
›
By confirming the stored value, the speed limit is disabled.
›
By reconfirming, the option to change the speed limit is activated.
If the set speed limit is exceeded, an audible signal will sound as a warning.
The menu item Speed warning (MAXI DOT display) or
(Segment display) ap-
pears in the display at the same time as the set threshold.
The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition.
MAXI DOT display
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Main menu
46
Settings 47
Compass point display 47
The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operat-
ing state of your vehicle. Depending on the vehicle equipment, it also provides
you with data relating to the radio, multifunction display (MFD), mobile phone,
navigation system, automatic gearbox » page 104 and devices connected via
the MDI input.
WARNING
Concentrate fully on your driving at all times! As the driver, you are fully re-
sponsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Main menu
Read and observe on page 46 first.
Press and hold button
A
or
C
» Fig. 26 on page 42 to activate the MAIN
MENU. By briefly pressing the
C
button you will reach one level higher.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
■
MFD (Multifunction display) » page 43
■
Audio » Operating instructions for the radio
■
Navigation » Operating instructions for the navigation system
■
Phone » page 90;
■
Vehicle status » page 33
■
Settings » page 47
The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory-fit-
ted radio or navigation system is switched on.
1)
If no value is set the output value 30 km/h is automatically displayed.
46
Using the system
Note
■
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must be verified to ac-
cess the main menu » page 42, Using the information system.
■
If the display is not activated at that moment, the menu always shifts to one
of the higher levels after approx. 10 seconds.
■
Using the factory-fitted radio or navigation system » Radio operating in-
structions or» navigation system operating instructions.
Settings
Read and observe on page 46 first.
You can change certain settings by means of the MAXI DOT display. The cur-
rent menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line.
The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment in-
stalled in the vehicle).
Language
You can set the language for the display texts here.
MFD data
Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here.
Time
The time, time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the changeover between
summer/winter time can be set here.
Winter tyres
Here, the speed and the switching on and off of the acoustic signals when ex-
ceeding this speed can be adjusted. This function is, for example, used for win-
ter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum
speed of the vehicle » page 148, Tyres and wheel rims.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the information display.
Winter tyres: max. speed ... km/h.
Units
The units for the temperature, consumption and distance driven can be set
here.
Alt. speed dis.
Here, the display of the second speed in mph
1)
can be activated.
Further information » page 33, Display of the second speed.
Service
The days and kilometres remaining until the next service can be displayed
here.
Factory setting
The display functions can be restored to their factory settings here.
Compass point display
Read and observe on page 46 first.
For vehicles with a factory fitted navigation system, an abbreviation for each
point of the compass (depending on the current direction of travel) is shown
on the top left-hand corner of the display.
The compass point display only operates when the ignition is switched on.
Service interval display
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
48
Prompt in the segment display
48
Resetting the service interval display
49
The service interval display shows the time and mileage to the next service
event.
The service due date is automatically displayed on the display and this infor-
mation can be displayed manually if necessary.
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or,
where applicable, days until the service due date is reached.
The information regarding the service intervals can be found in the service
schedule.
1)
For models with the speedometer in mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
47
Information system
Note
Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle
battery is disconnected.
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
Oil change service
If an oil change service is due, the following message appears: Oil change in ...
km or ... days.
As soon as the service interval date has been reached, the message Oil
change now! appears once the ignition has been switched on.
Inspection
If an inspection is due, the following message appears: Inspection in ... km
or ... days.
As soon as the service interval date has been reached, the message Inspec-
tion now! appears once the ignition has been switched on.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service appoint-
ment at any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Service
menu item » page 47, Settings or from the Vehicle status in the main menu of
the MAXI DOTdisplay » page 46, Main menu.
The following message is displayed for 10 seconds.
Oil change ... km / ... days
Inspection ... km / ... days
Prompt in the segment display
Fig. 29
Segment display: Example of a
message
Explanation of graphic » Fig. 29
Service due
Differentiating between types of service
Days remaining until the next service interval
Kilometres remaining until the next service interval
1)
Differentiating between types of service
The service type is determined by the number in position
A
» Fig. 29.
Oil change service
Inspection
Service due
If a service becomes due, then the following information is displayed for about
10 seconds » Fig. 29 .
›
The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position
A
.
›
The symbol
and the number of days remaining until the next service inter-
val are displayed in position
B
.
›
The symbol
and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position
C
.
As soon as the due date for the service has been reached, the flashing icon
and the message OIL CHNG or INSPEC_ appear in the display for about 20 sec-
onds after the ignition has been switched on.
Display the days and distance until the next service interval
You can press button
4
» Fig. 20 on page 30 repeatedly to display the remain-
ing distance and time to until the next service whenever the ignition is switch-
ed on.
A
B
C
1)
The kilometres remaining until the next service interval are displayed instead of the odometer.
48
Using the system
Information on the oil change service is displayed at first, followed by informa-
tion on the inspection when button
4
is pressed again.
›
The number 1 or 2 is displayed in position
A
.
›
The symbol
and the number of days remaining until the next service inter-
val are displayed in position
B
.
›
The symbol
and the number of kilometres remaining until the next service
interval are displayed in position
C
.
Resetting the service interval display
We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehi-
cle.
Variable service interval
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display, the values of a new service interval are displayed, which are based
on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating
conditions of the vehicle.
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
With the key on the lock cylinder unlock / lock 50
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key 50
Opening/closing a door 51
Safe securing system 51
Individual settings 52
Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the central locking button 52
Child safety lock 53
Malfunctions 53
Your car is equipped with a central locking system.
The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors, the fuel fill-
er flap and boot lid at the same time.
Depending on the equipment configuration, the following is true after
unlocking
›
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been
unlocked.
›
The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
›
The interior light, which is switched by the door contact, comes on.
›
The SafeLock system is switched off.
›
The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing.
›
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the SafeLock system
or anti-theft alarm system will be switched on. This function is intended to
prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
Depending on the equipment configuration, the following is true after
locking
›
The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been
locked.
›
The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked.
›
The interior lights connected over the door contact go off.
49
Unlocking and opening
›
The SafeLock system is switched on.
›
The warning light in the driver door begins flashing.
›
The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
WARNING
■
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
■
When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. The children might,
for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The ve-
hicle could then start to move – risk of injury and accidents! These individu-
als might also not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help
themselves. Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
CAUTION
■
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
■
Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust,
etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ig-
nition lock.
■
The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system
does react to the remote control at less than approx. 3 metres
away » page 166.
■
When leaving the vehicle, always check if it is locked.
■
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
Note
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the
vehicle.
With the key on the lock cylinder unlock / lock
Fig. 30
Left side of the vehicle: Turning
the key for unlocking and locking
the vehicle
Read and observe and on page 50 first.
The key allows you to unlock or lock the vehicle via the lock cylinder in the
driver's door.
Unlocking / locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 30
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Fig. 31
Remote control key
Read and observe and on page 50 first.
Function and description of the remote control key » Fig. 31
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
Unlocking / locking the boot lid
Button for the fold out / fold in of the key
Warning light
A
B
50
Using the system
Unlocking / locking the boot lid
Briefly pressing the symbol key unlocks the boot lid. After unlocking, the
boot lid can be opened with the button in the handle above the number plate.
Pressing and holding the symbol key
releases the boot lid (partially
opened).
If the boot lid is unlocked or released with the key symbol
on the remote
control key, then the lid is automatically locked after closing.
You can set a lock delay » page 55.
CAUTION
■
Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal inter-
ference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same fre-
quency range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).
■
Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and
the vehicle is in your line of sight.
■
The operating range of the remote control key is approx. 30 m. But this range
of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak.
Note
A ŠKODA partner can also activate/deactivate the acoustic signals on vehicles
with an anti-theft alarm system.
Opening/closing a door
Fig. 32 Door handle/door opening lever
Read and observe
and on page 50 first.
Opening from the outside
›
Unlock the vehicle.
›
Pull on door handle
A
» Fig. 32 on the door you wish to open.
Opening from the inside
›
Pull on door opening lever
B
of the respective door and push the door away
from you.
Closing from the inside
›
Grasp pull handle
C
and close the door.
WARNING
■
Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly
while driving – risk of death!
■
Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
■
An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury!
■
Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death!
Safe securing system
Read and observe
and on page 50 first.
The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the out-
side. The vehicle cannot be opened from the inside any more.
This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instru-
ment cluster after switching off the ignition.
Check SAFELOCK! Owner's manual!
CHECK DEADLOCK
Switching off
The safe lock can be switched off in one of the following ways.
›
By locking twice within 2 seconds.
›
By disabling the interior monitoring » page 54, Interior monitor and towing
protection.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
Switching on
The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and
unlocked.
51
Unlocking and opening
Switch-off display
The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out
and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
Switch-on display
The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards
it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people must
remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or
open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for
rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
Individual settings
Read and observe
and on page 50 first.
Opening a single door
The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.
The other doors and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after be-
ing opened again.
Automatic locking/unlocking
All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km/h. The button in the handle
of the boot lid is deactivated.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. It
is also possible to unlock the vehicle by pressing the central locking button
.
Note
■
Individual settings can be carried out in a specialist workshop.
■
For some countries with right-hand steering the function of the single door
opening is set at the factory.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the central locking button
Fig. 33
Central locking button
Read and observe and on page 50 first.
When the vehicle has not been locked from outside, the » Fig. 33 button can
be used to unlock or lock the vehicle.
Unlocking / locking » Fig. 33
If the icon
in the button is lit, the vehicle is locked.
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off.
The following applies after locking.
›
Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
›
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
›
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked
doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access
to the vehicle.
WARNING
■
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
■
If the Safelock system is switched on » page 51, the door opening levers
and the central locking buttons do not operate.
CAUTION
If at least one door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
52
Using the system
Child safety lock
Fig. 34 Back door: left / right
Read and observe
and on page 50 first.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Switching the cooling system on and off » Fig. 34
Switching on
Switching off
You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 50 first.
Failure of the central locking
If the central locking system fails only the driver's door can be locked or un-
locked with the key. The other doors and the boot lid can be or emergency re-
lease or locked.
›
Emergency locking of the door » page 167.
›
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid » page 167.
Displaying an error
If the indicator light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2
seconds, and then lights up for 30 seconds without interruption before flash-
ing again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
Discharged battery in the remote control key
If the red indicator light
B
» Fig. 31 on page 50 does not flash when you press
a button on the remote control key, the battery is empty.
Replace the battery » page 166.
Anti-theft alarm system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating/deactivating
54
Interior monitor and towing protection 54
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people
trying to break into the vehicle.
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to only as alarm).
Triggering the alarm
The alarm is triggered when the following unauthorized actions are carried out
on the locked vehicle.
›
Opening the bonnet.
›
Opening the boot lid.
›
Opening the doors.
›
Manipulation of the ignition lock.
›
Towing the vehicle » page 54.
›
Movement in the vehicle » page 54.
›
Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system.
›
Uncoupling the trailer » page 121, Attaching and detaching trailers.
If the driver's door of a vehicle with a remote control is unlocked and opened
by the lock cylinder, then the alarm is triggered.
Switching off the alarm
The alarm is turned off by pressing the
button on the radio remote control
key or switching on the ignition.
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the doors and windows are closed in or-
der to ensure that the alarm system is fully operational.
53
Unlocking and opening
Note
The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years.
Activating/deactivating
Read and observe on page 53 first.
Activating
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle is unlocked and a door or the boot lid not opened within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safe securing sys-
tem or anti-theft alarm system will be switched back on. This function is inten-
ded to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
Deactivating
The alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is unlocked. If
the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds, the alarm system is automatically
activated again.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Fig. 35
Button for interior monitor and
towing protection
Read and observe on page 53 first.
The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the
alarm.
The tow-away protection triggers the alarm if a vehicle is registered as being
on an inclination.
Activating
The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically af-
ter the vehicle is locked.
Deactivating
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Open the driver door.
›
Press the symbol button
» Fig. 35 on the B column of the driver's side.
The illumination of the symbol
in the button changes from red to orange.
›
Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibili-
ty of the alarm being triggered by movements (e.g. by children or animals)
within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train
or ship) or towed.
CAUTION
■
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the
interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.
■
The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked, even if
the safe securing system is deactivated. The interior monitor is however not
activated.
Luggage compartment lid
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening/closing 55
Delayed locking of the boot lid
55
WARNING
■
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise, the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the
lid was locked – risk of accident!
■
Never drive with the boot lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust
gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
■
Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment
lid, as otherwise it could crack – risk of injury!
■
Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
54
Using the system
Note
The function of the button in the grip above the licence plate is deactivated
when starting off or at a speed of 5 km/hour or more for vehicles with central
locking. The function is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is
opened.
Opening/closing
Fig. 36 Opening / closing tailgate
Read and observe on page 54 first.
After unlocking the vehicle, the boot lid can be opened with the button in the
handle above the number plate.
Opening / closing tailgate » Fig. 36
Unlocking the door
Open flap
Closing the flap (by pulling the handle)
Delayed locking of the boot lid
Read and observe
on page 54 first.
If the boot lid is unlocked with the symbol button
on the remote control
key, then the door is automatically locked after closing.
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
After activation of delayed locking, the boot lid can be opened again after clos-
ing within a limited period.
1
2
3
Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically. We therefore recommend locking the vehicle with the symbol
button
on the remote control key.
Power windows
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening/closing the windows
56
Force limit 56
The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is
switched on.
WARNING
The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter » page 56. If
there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres. However, the windows should be closed
carefully – risk of injury!
CAUTION
■
Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric
windows.
■
In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all eliminate the
ice » page 130, Windows and external mirrors and only then operate the elec-
trical power windows. Otherwise, the window sealing and the electrical power
window mechanism could be damaged.
■
Make sure that the windows are closed whenever you leave the locked vehi-
cle.
For the sake of the environment
At high speeds, you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily
high fuel consumption.
55
Unlocking and opening
Note
■
When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventila-
tion system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are
opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the
wind noise is more at certain speeds.
■
The window lift mechanism is equipped with protection against overheating.
Repeated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to
overheat. If this happens, it will not be possible to operate the window for a
short time. You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the over-
heating protection has cooled down.
Opening/closing the windows
Fig. 37 Power window buttons
Read and observe and on page 55 first.
All windows can be operated from the driver's seat.
Power window buttons » Fig. 37
Left front door
Right front door
Left rear door
Left rear door:
Disable / enable the buttons in the rear doors
Opening
›
Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position.
Releasing the button causes the window to halt immediately.
A
B
C
D
E
The driver's window can be completely opened automatically by briefly press-
ing the button as far as it will go. Renewed pressing of the button causes the
window to stop.
Closing
›
Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the
window has moved into the desired position.
Releasing the button causes the window to halt immediately.
Disable / enable the buttons in the rear doors
›
Press the button
E
» Fig. 37.
When the buttons are disabled in the rear doors, the indicator light
in the
button
E
lights up.
WARNING
If the rear seats are accommodating people who are not completely inde-
pendent, e.g. children, it is recommended that for safety reasons the but-
tons in the rear doors are disabled with the button
E
.
Force limit
Read and observe
and on page 55 first.
The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again
within the next 10 seconds - the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
56
Using the system
Mechanical windows
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Open / close window
57
The window can be operated mechanically by means of the handle attached to
the respective door panel.
WARNING
The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of injury!
CAUTION
■
In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all eliminate the
ice » page 130, Windows and external mirrors and only then operate the elec-
trical power windows. Otherwise, the window sealing and the electrical power
window mechanism could be damaged.
■
Make sure that the windows are closed whenever you leave the locked vehi-
cle.
For the sake of the environment
At high speeds, you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily
high fuel consumption.
Note
When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened,
dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind
noise is more at certain speeds.
Open / close window
Fig. 38 Window operations: left / right
Read and observe
and on page 57 first.
Only one window can be operated mechanically at any time.
Opening
Lift the crank in the direction of arrow
A
» Fig. 38.
Closing
Turn the crank in the direction of the arrow
B
» Fig. 38.
57
Unlocking and opening
Lights and visibility
Lights
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating the light function 58
Daytime running lights(DAY LIGHT) 59
Turn signal and main beam 60
Automatic driving lamp control 60
Fog lights 61
Fog lights with CORNER function 61
Rear fog light 61
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 62
Hazard warning light system 62
Parking light 63
Driving abroad 63
Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is switched on.
The position of some of the controls on right-hand drive models may differ
from that shown in » Fig. 39 on page 58. The symbols which mark the indi-
vidual positions of the controls are identical.
WARNING
■
The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with
national legal requirements.
■
The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the
lights.
WARNING (Continued)
■
The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and
does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the lights and, if
necessary, to switch on the light depending on the prevailing light condi-
tions. The light sensor cannot, for example, detect rain or snow. Under
these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights!
■
Never drive with only the side lights on! The side lights are not bright
enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by oth-
er oncoming traffic. Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is
dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the driving lights are switched
on, the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period, although
the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas. This mist
has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Operating the light function
Fig. 39
Light switch and control dial for
headlight range adjustment
Read and observe on page 58 first.
Switching lights on and off
Depending on the equipment configuration, the light switch
A
» Fig. 39 can be
moved to the following positions.
Turn switch
Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
Automatic switching lights on and off » page 60

58
Using the system
Switching on the parking light or parking lights
1)
» page 63
Switch on low beam
1)
Pull switch
Switch on the front fog lamp » page 61
Switching on the rear fog light» page 61
Headlight range control
Turning the dial
B
» Fig. 39 from the position
to
gradually adjusts the
headlight range control and thereby shortens the light cone.
The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol-
lowing car load.
Front seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot loaded
Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched
on.
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions.
■
The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
cles.
■
The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Note
■
An audible warning signal will sound if the light switch is in the or posi-
tion, the ignition key is removed and the driver's door is opened. The audible
warning signal is switched off after a few seconds or as a result of door con-
tact when the driver's door is closed. However, the side lights remain on to illu-
minate the parked vehicle if necessary.
■
If leaving the vehicle without needing the parking lights on, always turn
the light switch to position
.
Daytime running lights(DAY LIGHT)
Read and observe on page 58 first.
The daytime running lights (the only function) provides the lighting of the front
vehicle range.
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
The light switch is in the position
or

» Fig. 39 on page 58.
The ignition is switched on.
The parking aid is activated.
Deactivating the function
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Remove the fuse for the daytime running lights » page 169, Fuses in the
dash panel.
Activating the function
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Use a fuse of appropriate amperage for the daytime running
lights » page 169, Fuses in the dash panel.
Disable function on vehicles with the START-STOP system or with the
automatic driving light control
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Slide the turn signal light lever (» Fig. 40 on page 60) downwards and hold
it in this position.
›
Switch on the ignition – wait until the left-turn signal light flashes 4x.
›
Switch off the ignition – an audible signal sounds which confirms the deacti-
vation of the function.
›
Release the turn signal stalk.
Function on vehicles with the START-STOP system or with the automatic
driving light control
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Slide the turn signal light lever (» Fig. 40 on page 60) upwards and hold it in
this position.
›
Switch on the ignition – wait until the right-turn signal light flashes 4x.
›
Switch off the ignition – an audible signal sounds which confirms the activa-
tion of the function.
1)
On vehicles with the instrument cluster - Version 1 » page 30 the symbol also illuminates on the light
switch.
59
Lights and visibility
›
Release the turn signal stalk.
WARNING
When the daytime running light is switched on, the side lights (neither at
the front nor the rear) and the number plate lights are not lit. Therefore al-
ways switch on the low beam when the visibility is poor.
Turn signal and main beam
Fig. 40
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation
Read and observe on page 58 first.
Lever positions » Fig. 40
Switch on right turn signal
Switch on left turn signal
Switch on high beam (spring-loaded position)
Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded
position)
Main beam
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
The warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when the high beam
is switched on.
Flasher
The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off.
The warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster when the headlight
flasher is switched on.
Flashing
When the left flashing light is switched on, the warning light
flashes in the
instrument cluster.
A
B
C
D
When the right flashing light is switched on, the warning light flashes in the
instrument cluster.
The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a
curve or after making a turn.
The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal
light fails.
“Convenience turn signal”
If you only wish to flash three times, briefly push the lever to the upper or low-
er pressure point and release again.
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.
Automatic driving lamp control
Fig. 41
Light switch: AUTO position
Read and observe on page 58 first.
If the light switch is in position

» Fig. 41, the parking lights, low beam and
number plate lights are switched on or off automatically.
The light on/off switching is controlled by a sensor mounted under the wind-
screen in the holder of the inside mirror.
If the light switch is in position

, the lettering

illuminates next to the
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol
next to the
light switch also lights up.
60
Using the system
Automatic driving light control during rain
The low beam lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.
The light switch is in position

» Fig. 41.
Automatic wiping with rain - position
1
or wiping - position
2
or
3
is
turned on » page 66, Activating the windscreen wipers and washers.
The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s.
The light turns off about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
CAUTION
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the
windscreen to avoid impairing the function or its reliability.
Fog lights
Fig. 42
Light switch - Switch front and
rear fog light
Read and observe on page 58 first.
Switching on/off
›
Turn the light switch to position
or
» Fig. 42 .
›
Pull the light switch to position
1
.
The fog lights are switched off in the reverse order.
The warning light
lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are
switched on » page 34.
Fog lights with CORNER function
Read and observe on page 58 first.
The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on each side of the vehicle to
illuminate the area around the vehicle when turning, parking, etc.
The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.
The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to
the right or left
1)
.
The engine is running.
The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position

and
the low beam is switched on.
The daytime running lights are not switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
Note
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
Rear fog light
Read and observe
on page 58 first.
Switching on/off
›
Turn the light switch to position
or
» Fig. 42 on page 61 .
›
Pull the light switch to position
2
.
The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order.
The warning light
lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light
is switched on » page 34.
If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights, the rear fog light is switched on by
pulling out the light switch directly to the only possible setting.
Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory-fitted
towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and it is
driven with a trailer.
1)
If both switch-on conditions are conflicting, for example, if the front wheels are turned to the left and
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.
61
Lights and visibility
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Read and observe on page 58 first.
COMING HOME (hereinafter referred to only as a function) switches the light
automatically for a short time after leaving the vehicle.
LEAVING HOME (hereinafter referred to only as a function) switches the light
automatically for a short time when approaching the vehicle.
The function switches on the following light, depending on the equipment
fitted.
›
Parking lights,
›
Low beam
›
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors
›
Licence plate light
Poorer visibility is evaluated by sensor mounted in the holder of the interior
mirror.
COMING HOME
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
The light switch is in position

» Fig. 41 on page 60.
The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced.
The ignition is switched off.
The function was activated before leaving the vehicle by briefly switching
on the headlight flasher » page 60, Turn signal and main beam .
The driver's door was open - within 60 seconds after turning off the igni-
tion.
The light goes out 10 seconds after closing all of the doors and the boot lid.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out after 60 seconds.
LEAVING HOME
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met.
The light switch is in position

» Fig. 41 on page 60.
The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced.
The ignition is switched off.
The vehicle was unlocked with the radio remote control.
The light goes off after 10 seconds or when locking the vehicle.
CAUTION
■
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on
the windscreen to avoid impairing the function or its reliability.
■
If this function is activated constantly, the battery will be heavily discharged
particularly in short-haul travel.
Hazard warning light system
Fig. 43
Button for hazard warning light
system
Read and observe on page 58 first.
Switching on/off
›
Press the button
» Fig. 43.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
warning light system is switched on. The warning light for the turn signals and
the warning light in the button also flash at the same time. The hazard warn-
ing light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.
If the turn signal light is switched on when the hazard warning light and the
ignition are both switched on, then only the turn signal light on the corre-
sponding vehicle side will flash.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example, the following oc-
curs.
■
You encounter a traffic congestion.
■
The vehicle has broken down.
62
Using the system
Parking light
Read and observe on page 58 first.
The parking light is provided for a temporary lighting of the parked vehicle.
Parking light
switching on
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
Place the control lever into position
A
or
B
as far as it can go » Fig. 40 on
page 60 - the parking light on the right/left-hand side of the vehicle is
switched on.
If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is
switched off, the parking light
is not automatically switched on.
Switching on the side light on both sides
›
Turn the light switch
A
to position
» Fig. 39 on page 58 and lock the ve-
hicle.
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the au-
dible alarm is turned off, but the parking lights will remain switched on.
On vehicles with an instrument cluster -version 1 » page 30 the light switch
symbol
also illuminates when the two-sided parking light is switched on.
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded, especially
over short distances.
Driving abroad
Read and observe
on page 58 first.
The low beam is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of the road on
which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent.
When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the left/
right), asymmetric headlight adjustment can dazzle oncoming traffic. In order
to avoid this, the headlights must be adjusted at a specialist garage.
Note
You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist
garage.
Interior lighting
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front interior light
63
Rear interior light 64
Note
With the ignition off, the light turns off automatically after about 10 minutes.
Front interior light
Fig. 44 Operation of the front light: Version 1/version 2
Positions of the sliding light switch
A
» Fig. 44
Switching on
Switching off
Operating with the door contact switch
Switch for reading light
B
» Fig. 44
Switching left reading lamp on/off
Switching right reading lamp on/off
Conditions for operation of light with the door contact switch - setting
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
›
The vehicle is unlocked.
›
One of the doors is opened.
›
The ignition key is removed.
63
Lights and visibility
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
›
The vehicle is locked.
›
The ignition is switched on.
›
About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
Rear interior light
Fig. 45
Interior lights at the rear
Switch for lamp » Fig. 45
Switching on/off
The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior light
1)
.
›
When the front interior lighting is switched on, the rear interior lighting also
turns on automatically.
›
When the front interior lighting is switched off, the rear interior lighting can
be turned on/off as required.
Visibility
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Rear window heater 64
Front sun visors
65
Rear window heater
Fig. 46
Dash panel: Button for rear win-
dow heater
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the rear window.
Button in the center console » Fig. 46
Switching the rear window heater on/off
When the heater is switched on, a lamp lights up inside the button.
The heating only works when the engine is running.
The heater automatically switches off after approximately 7 minutes.
For the sake of the environment
The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de-iced or free
from mist. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on
fuel economy.
Note
■
If the on-board voltage drops, the heater switches off automatically, in order
to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 147, Auto-
matic load deactivation.
■
If the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery.
1)
This function only applies to certain countries. In some countries, the light at the rear is controlled inde-
pendently from the light at the front.
64
Using the system
Front sun visors
Fig. 47 Fold down the cover / swivel cover to the door and slide the mir-
ror cover
The sun visors protect you from the blazing sun.
Sun visors » Fig. 47
Fold down the cover
Swivel cover towards the door
Makeup mirror with cover
Slide mirror cover
WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de-
ployment area of the head airbags if any objects are attached to them. Ini-
tiation of the head airbags may cause injury.
Windscreen wipers and washers
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Activating the windscreen wipers and washers 66
Headlight cleaning system 66
The wiper and washer system provide a good view through the windscreen or
rear window.
The windshield wipers and the windshield washer system only operate if the
ignition is switched on.
1
2
A
B
Top up with windscreen wiper fluid » page 139.
WARNING
■
Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi-
bility and safe driving » page 168.
■
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
■
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
■
Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is not released
from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers man-
ually depending on the visibility conditions.
CAUTION
■
If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on,
the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the igni-
tion is turned back on. The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold tempera-
tures between the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned
back on again.
■
In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before the journey or be-
fore switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windscreen. If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are fro-
zen to the windscreen, this may damage both the blades and windscreen wip-
er motor!
■
Carefully peel frozen wiper blades off the windscreen.
■
Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving.
■
Do not switch on the ignition if the front wiper arms are retracted. The wiper
arms could damage the paint of the bonnet.
■
If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to
the windscreen.
Note
■
To avoid streaking, the wiper blades must be kept clean » page 132.
■
The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en-
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx. +10 °C.
65
Lights and visibility
Activating the windscreen wipers and washers
Fig. 48 Operation of the screen wiper and washer: front / rear
Read and observe
and on page 65 first.
Lever positions
0
 Wipers off
1
Periodic windscreen wiping/automatic wiping in rain
2
 Slow windscreen wiping
3
 Rapid windscreen wiping
4
Flick windscreen wiping, service position of the wiper
arms » page 168, (spring-loaded position)
5
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen (spring-tensioned position)
6
Wiping the rear window pane (the windscreen wiper wipes at regu-
lar intervals after a few seconds)
7
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window (spring-tensioned posi-
tion)
A
Switches for setting: the desired pause between the individual wip-
er strokes / the speed of the wiping in rain (operating lever in the
position
1
)
Interval windscreen wiping
The wiping intervals are also speed-dependent regulated.
Automatic windscreen wiping in rain
The wiping intervals are controlled depending on the rain intensity.
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
The wash system operates immediately, the windscreen wipers wipe some-
what later.
Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to
stop and the wipers to continue for another 1-3 wiper strokes (depending on
the spraying duration).
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window
The wash system operates immediately, the windscreen wiper wipes some-
what later.
Letting go of the operating lever will cause the windscreen wash system to
stop and the wiper to continue for another 1-3 wiper strokes (depending on
the spraying duration). The operating lever remains in position
6
.
Note
The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
Headlight cleaning system
Read and observe and on page 65 first.
After the ignition is switched on, the headlights are always cleaned at the first
and after every tenth spray of the windscreen (setting
5
» Fig. 48 on
page 66), when the low beam or main beam is switched on.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight
lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. The following guide-
lines must be observed » page 130, Headlight glasses.
To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter, any
snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be
cleared with a de-icing spray.
CAUTION
Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand – risk of
damage!
Rear mirror
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Interior mirror
67
Exterior mirror 68
66
Using the system
WARNING
■
Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice, snow, mist or other ob-
jects.
■
Convex (curved outward) or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of
vision. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These
mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the fol-
lowing vehicles.
■
Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to
the following vehicles.
Interior mirror
Fig. 49 Interior mirror: manual dimming / auto-dimming / light sensor
Read and observe
on page 67 first.
Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 49
Basic position of the mirror
Mirror blackout
Mirror with automatic dimming » Fig. 49
Warning light - lights when dimming is activated
Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming
Light sensor
Light sensor on the back of the mirror
Mirror with automatic dimming
If the automatic dimming is enabled, the mirror dims automatically depending
on the light falling on the sensors.
1
2
A
B
C
D
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicini-
ty of the automatic dimming interior mirror » .
WARNING
The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to opera-
tional faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain an electrolyte liquid which can
escape if mirror glass is broken.
■
The leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin, eyes and breath appara-
tus. Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle. If this is not pos-
sible, at least open the window.
■
If you swallow electrolytic fluid, seek medical assistance immediately.
■
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water.
Then consult a doctor immediately.
CAUTION
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the light striking the sen-
sors is not affected by other objects.
67
Lights and visibility
Exterior mirror
Fig. 50 Exterior mirror operation: mechanical / electrical
Read and observe
on page 67 first.
Adjust the position
The mirror can be adjusted to the desired position by moving the knob in the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 50.
The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary
knob.
Electrically-adjustable mirrors
The knob can be moved into the following positions » Fig. 50 -
.
Adjust the left mirror
Adjust the right mirror
Switch off mirror control
Mirror heater
Folding in the exterior mirrors
The whole exterior mirror can be manually folded towards the side windows.
To put it back into its original position, it should be folded back from the side
window until it audibly clicks into place.
WARNING
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning.
Note
■
The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an
outside temperature of +35 ℃.
■
If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by
hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
68
Using the system
Seats and head restraints
Seats and head restraints
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting the front seats 69
Head restraints - adjusting height 70
Headrests - removing and installing 70
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that
the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent
arms.
Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following:
›
Reaching the controls safely and quickly,
›
A relaxed and fatigue-free body position.
›
Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.
WARNING
■
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
■
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
■
Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle.
■
Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat, except objects de-
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.
Adjusting the front seats
Fig. 51
Control elements at the seat
Read and observe on page 69 first.
Control elements at the seat » Fig. 51
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
Adjusting height of seat
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
›
Pull lever
A
» Fig. 51 (in the centre) in the direction of arrow and push the
seat in the required direction.
The lock must click into place after you release the lever.
Adjusting height of seat
›
Again push or pull the lever
B
» Fig. 51 in the direction of one of the arrows.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
›
The seat back release (do not lean on).
›
Pull the lever
C
» Fig. 51 in direction of arrow and with your back set the de-
sired inclination of the seat back.
After releasing the lever the seat backrest will remain in the set position.
A
B
C
69
Seats and head restraints
Head restraints - adjusting height
Fig. 52 Head rests: move upwards / move downwards
Read and observe
on page 69 first.
Adjustment of the head rest heights is the same in the front and rear.
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head rest is at the same level
as the upper part of your head.
Move upwards
›
Push the headrest in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 52.
Move downwards
›
Press the locking button
A
in the direction of the arrow
2
and
hold » Fig. 52.
›
Push the headrest in the direction of arrow
3
.
WARNING
With seats occupied, the respective head rests must be correctly set (may
not be in the bottom position) - there is a risk of fatal injury!
Note
For the sports seats, the head restraints are integrated into the front seat
backrests. This headrest cannot be adjusted in height.
Headrests - removing and installing
Fig. 53 Front head rests: remove / install
Fig. 54 Rear head rests: remove / install
Read and observe on page 69 first.
Front restraint
›
Pull the restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
›
Press the locking button
A
in the direction of arrow
1,
and pull the support
in the direction of arrow
2.
›
To re-insert the head restraint, push it far enough down in the direction of
arrow
3
into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place.
Rear restraint
›
Pull the restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
›
Press the locking button
B
in the direction of arrow
4
, while at the same
time using a flat screwdriver with a max. width of 5 mm to press the securing
button in opening
C
in the direction of arrow
5
.
›
Remove the restraint in the direction of arrow
6
.
70
Using the system
›
To re-insert the head restraint, push it far enough down in the direction of
arrow
7
into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place.
WARNING
With seats occupied, the respective head rests must be installed and adjus-
ted correctly - there is a risk of fatal injury!
Note
For the sports seats, the head restraints are integrated into the front seat
backrests. These headrests cannot be removed.
Seat features
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front seat heating
71
Front armrest 72
Rear armrest 72
Seat backrests 72
Front seat heating
Fig. 55
Buttons for heating the front
seats
The seat backrests and seats can be heated electrically.
The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running.
Buttons for the seat heater » Fig. 55
Left seat heating
Right seat heating
Switching on
›
Press the corresponding symbol button or » Fig. 55.
Pressing once switches the seat heating on at its maximum level - Level 2.
With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is reduced
until it is switched off.
The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illuminated warning
lights in the switch.
WARNING
If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity,
e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabe-
tes), we recommend you do not use seat heating on the driver or front pas-
senger seat. This can lead to burns on the back, the posterior and the legs
which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to
make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that
the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your
doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
CAUTION
■
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
■
The seat heating in the following cases will not turn on - there is a risk of
damaging the seat covers and seat heating.
■
The seats are not occupied by people.
■
Items are fastened or stored items on the seats, such as a child seat, a bag
and the like.
■
Additional seat covers or protective covers are fixed to the seats.
■
Clean the seat covers » page 134.
Note
■
If the heaters for the rear seats are set to their highest intensity - level 2,
they are automatically switched down to level 1 after 15 minutes.
■
If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating switches off automatically, in
order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 147,
Automatic load deactivation.
71
Seats and head restraints
Front armrest
Fig. 56
Adjusting armrest
Setting the height
›
Lift the armrest fully upwards in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 56 and then
move it back down completely.
›
Move the armrest into one of the 5 locking positions.
The armrest includes a storage compartment » page 78.
Rear armrest
Fig. 57
Fold the armrest forward
Folding forward
›
Pull on the loop
A
and fold the armrest forward in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 57.
A cup holder may be located in the armrest » page 74.
Seat backrests
Fig. 58 Fold seat backrest forwards / pull seat belt to the side panel and
ready position of the seat belt
The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backr-
ests forward. The seat backrests can also be folded forward individually on ve-
hicles with divided rear seats.
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests.
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear head
restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward »
.
Fold down split seat backrest
›
Insert the belt buckle latching element
C
of the seat belt into the opening in
the side panel - ready position » Fig. 58.
›
Press the release lever
A
in the direction of arrow
1
.
›
Remove the backrest in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fold down undivided seat backrest
›
Insert the belt buckle latching elements
C
of the outer belts into the open-
ings in the side panel - ready position » Fig. 58.
›
Push the release handles
A
on both sides of the seat backrest in the direc-
tion of arrow
1
simultaneously.
›
Remove the backrest in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fold back split seat backrest
›
If you removed the head restraint, you need to reinsert it with the backrest
tilted slightly forwards.
›
Pull the rear outer seat belt to the side panel in the direction of arrow
3
» Fig. 58.
72
Using the system
›
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing
knob
A
clicks into place – check by pulling on the seat backrest » .
›
Make sure that the red pin
B
is hidden.
Fold back undivided seat backrest
›
If you removed the head restraints, you need to reinsert them with the back-
rest tilted slightly forwards.
›
Insert the belt buckle latching elements
C
of the outer belts into the open-
ings in the side panel - ready position » Fig. 58.
›
Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the release
levers
A
on either side of the seat back click into place – check by pulling on
the seat backrest » .
›
Make sure that the red pins
B
on both sides of the seat back are not visible.
WARNING
■
The seat belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after
folding back the seat backrests – they must be ready to use.
■
The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects
in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on
sudden braking – risk of injury.
■
In occupied rear seats make sure that the respective seat backrests are
properly engaged.
CAUTION
■
Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backr-
ests. Under no circumstances must the seat belts be jammed by the folded
back seat backrests.
■
Store the head restraints that were removed in such a way that they are not
damaged or soiled.
Transporting and practical equipment
Useful equipment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Car park ticket holder 74
stowage compartments in the doors 74
Storage compartment in the centre console 74
Cup holders 74
Cigarette lighter 75
Ashtray 76
12-Volt power outlet 76
Waste container 77
Multimedia holder 77
Storage compartment in the front arm rest 78
Glasses compartment 78
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 78
Clothes hook 79
Storage pockets on the front seats 79
Net pockets on the front seat rest 80
WARNING
■
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may distract you
from concentrating on the traffic – there is the risk of an accident.
■
When driving, ensure that no objects from the centre console or from oth-
er storage compartments can get into the driver's footwell. You would not
be able to brake, operate the clutch pedal or accelerate - danger of causing
an accident!
■
No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
■
Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like. may only be placed in the ashtray!
73
Transporting and practical equipment
Car park ticket holder
Fig. 59
Parking ticket holder
Read and observe on page 73 first.
The note holder » Fig. 59 is designed e.g. for attaching car park tickets.
WARNING
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order
not to restrict the driver's vision.
stowage compartments in the doors
Fig. 60
Storage compartment: in the front door/in the rear door
Read and observe on page 73 first.
Storage compartments » Fig. 60
Storage compartment in the front doors
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 litres in the front doors
Storage compartment in the rear doors
Bottle compartment, max. capacity 0.5 l in the rear doors
A
B
C
D
WARNING
Do not use the storage compartment
A
» Fig. 60 of the door pocket to
store projecting objects. These could impair the effectiveness of the side
airbag.
Storage compartment in the centre console
Fig. 61 Non-lockable compartment, front / rear
Read and observe
on page 73 first.
Non-lockable compartment » Fig. 61
In the front centre console
In the rear centre console
Cup holders
Fig. 62 Cup holder at the front/rear
A
B
74
Using the system
Fig. 63
Cup holder in rear armrest
Read and observe on page 73 first.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder.
Placement of the cup holders » Fig. 62 and » Fig. 63
In the front centre console
In the rear centre console
In the rear armrest
WARNING
■
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
■
Never put hot cups in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, they may spill –
risk of scalding!
■
No objects should be placed in the holders that might endanger the vehi-
cle's occupants if the vehicle brakes suddenly or the vehicle is in collision.
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
A
B
C
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 64
Cigarette lighter
Read and observe on page 73 first.
Using the system
›
Press in the button in the cigarette lighter
» Fig. 64.
›
Wait until the button pops forward.
›
Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use.
›
Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket.
The cigarette lighter also operates if the ignition is switched off » .
WARNING
■
When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These could oper-
ate the lighter and get burned, start a fire or damage the interior.
■
Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Improper usage can cause
burns.
Note
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12- volt socket for electrical
appliances » page 76, 12-Volt power outlet.
75
Transporting and practical equipment
Ashtray
Fig. 65 Remove front / rear ashtray
Read and observe
on page 73 first.
The ashtray can be used for discarding ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like » .
Removing
›
Pull out the ashtray in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 65.
Fitting
›
Push-in the ashtray against the direction of the arrow » Fig. 65.
WARNING
Never place flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
CAUTION
When removing, do not hold the ashtray at the cover – risk of breakage.
12-Volt power outlet
Fig. 66
12-Volt power socket
Read and observe on page 73 first.
Use
›
Remove the socket cover or the cigarette lighter » Fig. 66.
›
Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
The socket also operates if the ignition is switched off .»
WARNING
■
Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. Therefore, when leaving the
vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as
children, unattended in the vehicle.
■
If the connected electric device becomes too hot, switch it off and discon-
nect it from the power supply immediately.
CAUTION
■
The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces-
sories with a total power uptake of up to 120 watt.
■
Never exceed the maximum power consumption, otherwise the vehicle's
electrical system can be damaged.
■
Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
■
Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket.
■
Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility
in accordance with the applicable directives.
■
Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch
the ignition on or off and before starting the engine, to avoid damage from
voltage fluctuations.
■
Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices!
76
Using the system
Waste container
Fig. 67 Waste container: insert and move / open / replace bag
Read and observe on page 73 first.
The waste container can be inserted into the slots in the doors » page 74.
Insert waste container
›
Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
›
Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 67.
›
Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow
2.
Remove the waste container
›
Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
» Fig. 67.
Open/close waste container
›
Open the waste container in the direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 67.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
›
Remove the waste container from the slot.
›
Push the two catches of the inner frame out of the container body in the di-
rection of the arrow
4
» Fig. 67.
›
Pull the bag together with the inner frame down in the direction of arrow
5
.
›
Remove the bag from the inside frame.
›
Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction
of arrow
6
.
›
Insert the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow
7
into the container
body.
The two catches of the inner frame must click into place.
WARNING
Never use the waste container as an ashtray - risk of fire!
Note
We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags.
Multimedia holder
Fig. 68
Multimedia holder
Read and observe on page 73 first.
You can use this multimedia holder» Fig. 68 to store e.g. a mobile phone, MP3
player or similar devices.
WARNING
Never use the multimedia holder as an ashtray - risk of fire!
77
Transporting and practical equipment
Storage compartment in the front arm rest
Fig. 69 Storage compartment / open storage compartment
Read and observe
on page 73 first.
Opening
›
Grasp the armrests in the area
A
» Fig. 69.
›
Lift the lid of the storage box in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
›
Fold the lid of the storage box back in the opposite direction to the ar-
row » Fig. 69 until it audibly clicks into place.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Glasses compartment
Fig. 70
Opening the glasses storage box
Read and observe on page 73 first.
Opening
›
Press on the lid of the glasses storage box in area
A
» Fig. 70.
The box folds in the direction of the arrow.
Closing
›
Swivel the lid of the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 70 until it audibly clicks into place.
WARNING
■
The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the
spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed – risk of injury.
■
The open compartment restricts the driver's view - there is a danger of
accidents!
CAUTION
■
The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g.
■
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box – they may
be damaged.
■
The compartment must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle –
risk of impairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system!
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Fig. 71 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and
open air supply
Read and observe
on page 73 first.
Opening
›
Pull the handle to position
1
» Fig. 71 in the direction of the arrow.
78
Using the system
›
Open the cover in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Closing
›
Screw in the filler cap in the direction of arrow
3
until it audibly clicks into
place » Fig. 71.
Air supply into the storage compartment
›
By turning the rotary switch in the direction of arrow
A
until it stops, the air
supply is opened » Fig. 71.
›
By turning the rotary switch opposite direction of arrow
A
until it stops the
air supply is closed.
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
un-cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Note
■
A 1 litre bottle (max. capacity) can be stored in the storage compartment on
the front passenger's side.
■
When the storage compartment is opened, a light lights up.
■
If the cooling of the storage compartment is not used, we recommend that
you leave the air supply closed.
Clothes hook
Read and observe on page 73 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors.
WARNING
■
Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks. Never leave any heavy or
sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.
■
Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing; this may re-
duce the effectiveness of the head airbags.
■
Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
to the rear.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.
Storage pockets on the front seats
Fig. 72
Map pockets
Read and observe on page 73 first.
The storage pockets » Fig. 72 are intended for the storage of maps, magazines,
etc.
WARNING
Never put heavy items into the map pockets – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Never put large objects into the map pockets, e.g. bottles or objects with sharp
edges - risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings.
79
Transporting and practical equipment
Net pockets on the front seat rest
Fig. 73
Meshed pocket
Read and observe on page 73 first.
The net pockets are used for storage of small and light objects, such as mobile
phones and the like.
The net pockets are located on the inner sides of the front seat backr-
ests » Fig. 73.
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the meshed pockets.
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
CAUTION
■
The maximum permissible load of the meshed pockets is 150 g.
■
Never put large objects, e.g. bottles or objects with sharp edges into the
mesh pockets - risk of damaging the mesh pockets and seat coverings.
Luggage compartment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fastening elements 81
Fixing nets
81
Hooks
82
Luggage compartment cover
82
“Parking position” of the boot cover
83
Storage compartment in the boot
83
Cargo elements
83
Double-sided floor covering 84
Class N1 vehicles 84
Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling
characteristics of your vehicle:
›
Distribute loads as evenly as possible.
›
Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
›
Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or by using the fixing
nets » page 81.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an object
with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times its
own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg “ ”.
Luggage compartment light
The warning light turns on when tailgate is opened.
The warning light turns off when the tailgate is closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish
automatically after around 10 minutes.
WARNING
■
Always store transported objects in the boot and attach them to the lash-
ing eyes.
■
Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in
case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users.
■
Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger
of death!
■
Please note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling proper-
ties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity – risk of
accident! The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.
■
If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of
braking manoeuvres or accidents. To prevent items of luggage from moving
around, always use suitable lashing straps that are firmly attached to the
lashing eyes.
80
Using the system
WARNING (Continued)
■
The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are
able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres – risk of in-
jury!
■
When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats » page 11, Correct seated position
for the passengers in the rear seats.
■
If the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied, ensure maxi-
mum safety, e.g. by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that
the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision.
■
Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid open or unlatched, other-
wise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poison-
ing!
■
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle – risk of accident!
■
Do not transport people in the boot!
CAUTION
■
Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of abrasive objects.
■
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load » page 149.
Fastening elements
Fig. 74
Fasteners
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
Overview of the fasteners » Fig. 74
Lashing eyelets for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets
Fastening element only for fastening fixing nets
Lashing eyes only for fastening fixing nets
A
B
C
The upper front lashing eye
C
is located behind the folding rear seat backrest.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible static load of the individual lashing eyes
A
is 3.5 kN
(350 kg).
Fixing nets
Fig. 75 Fastening examples for nets
Fig. 76
Fastening vertical pocket
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 75
Horizontal pocket
Floor net
Vertical pocket
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets. Heavy ob-
jects are not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
A
B
C
81
Transporting and practical equipment
CAUTION
■
The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1.5 kg.
■
Do not place any sharp objects in the nets – risk of net damage.
Hooks
Fig. 77
Hooks
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
The hook is used to affix small items of luggage such as bags.
The hooks are located on both sides of the luggage compartment » Fig. 77.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg.
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 78 Removing the boot cover
Read and observe
and on page 80 first.
The boot cover can be removed if you want to transport bulky goods.
Removing
›
Unhook the retaining straps
A
from the flap in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 78.
›
Hold the cover in the upper position and press the bottom of the cover in the
area of the pin
C
.
›
Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow
2
.
The dismantled luggage compartment cover can be stowed away behind the
rear seat backrest in the so called “parking position” » page 83.
Installing
›
Place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel.
›
Position the mounts on the cover
B
onto the side trim panel via pins
C
» Fig. 78.
›
Press on the upper side of the cover so that the mounts fully interlock into
the pins.
›
Insert the retaining bands
A
opposite to the direction of arrow
1
on the
boot lid.
WARNING
No objects may be placed on the boot cover, the vehicle occupants could be
endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with some-
thing.
CAUTION
■
The maximum permissible load of the luggage compartment cover is 1 kg.
■
When closing the boot lid, jamming and damage to the luggage compartment
cover or the side trim panel can occur if handled in an unprofessional way. The
following guidelines must be observed.
■
The holders
B
on the cover must be resting completely on the pins
C
on
the side panel » Fig. 78.
■
The items which are transported must not exceed the height of the lug-
gage compartment cover in the lower position.
■
The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com-
partment lid when it is in the upper position.
■
There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the upper posi-
tion and the rear backrest.
■
After removing the luggage compartment cover, store it in such a way that it
cannot be damaged or soiled.
82
Using the system
Note
If the support straps
A
» Fig. 78 are attached to the boot, then the boot cover
will raise when the boot is opened.
“Parking position” of the boot cover
Fig. 79
Parking position of the luggage
compartment cover
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
The boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.
Adjusting
›
Slide the dismantled cover between the rear seat backrest and the bolt
A
» Fig. 79.
WARNING
The luggage compartment cover in the “parking position” restricts the driv-
er's view at the back.
Storage compartment in the boot
Fig. 80 Remove the tray cover on the left / right
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
The side compartment covers can be removed to increase the size of the lug-
gage compartment.
Removing/Inserting
›
Grasp the top part of the cover and remove it in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 80.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
CAUTION
■
The storage compartments are designed for storing small objects of up to
1.5 kg. in weight in total.
■
When using the storage compartment, take care not to damage it or the lug-
gage compartment lining.
Cargo elements
Fig. 81
Removing cargo elements / example on how to mount the load by
means of the cargo element
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
The Cargo elements can be used for mounting and securing of the load from
slipping in the boot.
The Cargo elements can be stored under the floor in the boot.
Secure load
›
Remove the cargo elements in direction of arrow » Fig. 81 -
.
›
Secure the cargo element with Velcro on the floor covering of the luggage
compartment » Fig. 81 -
.
83
Transporting and practical equipment
CAUTION
The cargo elements are designed for attaching loads with a maximum gross
weight of 8 kg.
Double-sided floor covering
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
You can fit a double-sided floor covering in the luggage compartment.
One side of the double-sided floor covering is made of fabric, the other side is
washable (easy to maintain).
The washable side is used to transport wet or dirty items.
Note
For easier turning of the covering, use the loop attached.
Class N1 vehicles
Read and observe and on page 80 first.
In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
complies with the EN 12195 standard (1-4) must be used for fastening the load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.
Roof rack
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
fixing points for base support 85
Roof load
85
WARNING
■
The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached – risk
of accident!
■
Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps
or tensioning straps.
■
Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system.
■
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, handling of the car may change as a result of the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■
Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres.
■
The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstance – risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
■
Only roof racks from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range should be used.
■
When dealing with roof rack systems, the installation instructions supplied
with the roof luggage rack system must be observed.
■
On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the extended
sliding/tilting roof does not hit any items of luggage transported on the roof.
■
Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
■
The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system
and the load that is secured to it. Compare the vehicle height with available
clearances, such as underpasses and garage doors.
■
Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated
car wash.
■
Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load.
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.
84
Using the system
fixing points for base support
Fig. 82 Attachment points
Read and observe
and on page 84 first.
Installation location of the attachment points for roof rack bars » Fig. 82
Front attachment points
Rear attachment points
Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions.
CAUTION
Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the en-
closed instructions.
Roof load
Read and observe and on page 84 first.
The maximum permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 75 kg and
the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower
load carrying capacity is used. In this case, the roof rack system must only be
loaded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions.
A
B
Heating and air conditioning
Heating, ventilation, cooling
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Air outlet vents 86
Air distribution control 87
Heating 87
Air conditioning (manual air conditioning) 88
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) 88
Efficient handling of the cooling system 89
malfunctions 89
The heating and air conditioning ventilate and heat the vehicle interior. The air
conditioning system also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met.
The cooling system is switched on.
The engine is running.
The outside temperature is above approx. +2 °C.
The blower is switched on.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in
the vehicle. The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during
winter months.
It is possible to briefly activate re-circulated air mode to enhance the cooling
effect » page 87.
WARNING
■
For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the win-
dows are free of ice, snow and misting.
■
The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
85
Heating and air conditioning
WARNING (Continued)
■
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
■
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for
the use of the cooling system are to be observed.
■
The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air
temperature should not be greater than about 5 ° C.
■
The cooling system is to be turned off about 10 minutes before the end
of the journey.
■
Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner or the Climatronic is to
be carried out by a specialist company.
CAUTION
■
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free from ice, snow or leaves,
for example, to ensure that the heating and cooling system works properly.
■
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak!
■
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to
ensure that the engine cools down.
Note
The used air streams out through the vents in the luggage compartment.
Air outlet vents
Fig. 83
Air outlet vents
Read and observe and on page 85 first.
Warmed, not warmed fresh or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet
vents according to the setting of the control and the outside atmospheric con-
ditions.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3 and
4 » Fig. 83 and the outlets can also be opened and closed individually.
Changing the direction of air flow
›
To change the height of the air flow, turn the horizontal fins upward or
downward using the movable adjuster
A
» Fig. 83.
›
To adjust the lateral direction of the air flow, turn the vertical fins with the
movable adjuster
A
to the left or to the right.
Opening
›
Turn the regulator
B
» Fig. 83upwards.
Closing
›
Turn the regulator
B
» Fig. 83downwards.
An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air
outlet
Setting the direction of the air
outlet
Active air outlet vents
1, 2, 4
1, 2, 4, 5
4, 5
3, 4
Note
To ensure that the heating and air conditioning systems work properly, do not
block the air outlet vents.
86
Using the system
Air distribution control
Read and observe and on page 85 first.
Recirculated air mode mostly prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from
getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when
standing in a traffic jam.
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then
fed back into the interior.
Heating and air conditioning (manual air conditioning)
To turn the recirculation mode on or off, press the Symbol key
.
The air recirculation mode is automatically turned off by turning the air distri-
bution control
C
to position
» Fig. 84 on page 87 or » Fig. 85 on
page 88.
Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly
pressing the symbol button
.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
To switch on press the Symbol key
. The symbol
(pos.
7
» Fig. 86 on
page 88) appears in the display.
To switch off press the symbol key
again. The
symbol in the display
goes out.
WARNING
The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time,
because there is no supply of fresh air from the outside. “Stale air” may re-
sult in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases.
Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up.
CAUTION
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air operation
is switched on. The smoke sucked from inside the vehicle is deposited on the
evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the
air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through con-
siderable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Note
If recirculated air mode is switched on for around 15 minutes, the symbol
will begin to flash in the Climatronic display as a sign that the recirculated air
mode is switched on long-term. If the recirculated air mode is not switched off,
the symbol flashes for around 5 minutes.
Heating
Fig. 84 Heating Controls
Read and observe and on page 85 first.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the knob or pressing
the button. When the function is on the warning light illuminates in the but-
ton.
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 84
Setting temperature
›
Lower temperature
›
Increase temperature
Set the blower level (level 0: Blower off, level 4: the highest blower speed)
Set the direction of the air outlet » page 86
›
Air flow to the windows
›
Air flow to the upper body
›
Air flow in the footwell
›
Airflow over the windows and into the footwell
Switch recirculation on/off » page 87
A
B
C
87
Heating and air conditioning
Air conditioning (manual air conditioning)
Fig. 85 Controls of the air conditioning
Read and observe
and on page 85 first.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the knob or pressing
the respective button. When the function is on the warning light illuminates in
the button.
Functions of the individual controls » Fig. 85
Setting temperature
›
Lower temperature
›
Increase temperature
Set the blower level (level 0: Blower off, level 4: the highest blower speed)
Set the direction of the air outlet » page 86
›
Air flow to the windows
›
Air flow to the upper body
›
Air flow in the footwell
›
Airflow over the windows and into the footwell
Switch recirculation on/off » page 87
Switch the cooling system on/off
Note
■
The warning light in the button  lights up after activation, even if not all of
the conditions for the function of the cooling system have been met. By light-
ing up of the warning light in the button, the operational readiness of the cool-
ing system is signalled.
■
During operation of the air conditioning, an increase in engine idle speed may
occur under certain circumstances in order to ensure sufficient heating com-
fort.
A
B
C

Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Fig. 86 Controls the Climatronic
Read and observe
and on page 85 first.
The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best-possible setting of the
temperature of the outflowing air, the blower stage and air distribution.
The system also takes sunlight into account, which eliminates the need to al-
ter the settings manually afterwards.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the knob or pressing
the respective button. When the function is on the corresponding symbol ap-
pears in the display.
Functions of the various controls and display » Fig. 86
Setting temperature
›
Lower temperature
›
Increase temperature
Selected temperature
Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit
Automatic operation of the air conditioning system is switched on
Intensive windshield defroster switched on
Direction of air flow
Recirculated air mode activated
Cooling system activated
Set blower speed
Set the temperature (turn to the left: Reduce fan speed, turn to the right:
Increase blower speed)
Interior temperature sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
88
Using the system
Switching automatic mode on
Switching the intensive windshield defroster on/off - when this function
is switched on, the warning light illuminates in the button
Switching the airflow to the windows on and off
Switching the airflow to the upper body on and off
Switching the airflow to the footwell on and off
Switch recirculation on/off » page 87
Switch the cooling system on/off
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation function remains
active, whereby the lowest temperature that can be reached is the outside
temperature.
Setting temperature
The set temperature value appears in the display (pos.
2
» Fig. 86).
To switch between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit, the keys

and

are to be pressed and held simultaneously.
The information appears in the display in the desired temperature measuring
unit (pos.
3
» Fig. 86).
The interior temperature can be set between +18 °C and +29 ℃. The interior
temperature is regulated automatically within this range.
If you select the temperature below +18 ℃, “LO” appears in the display.
If you select a temperature higher than +29 ℃, “HI” appears in the display.
At both end positions, Climatronic runs at maximum cooling/heating output
and the temperature is automatically not regulated.
Controlling blower
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with
the interior temperature. However, the blower level can be manually adjusted
to suit your particular needs.
If the blower speed is reduced to a minimum, Climatronic is switched off.
The blower speed set is indicated by displaying the corresponding number of
segments (Pos.
9
» Fig. 86) in the display.
Automatic mode
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
To switch on press the button

. The display shows

(pos.
4
» Fig. 86).


Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air
distribution or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is
nevertheless regulated.
WARNING
■
Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary.
■
Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up.
Note
■
Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor
11
» Fig. 86; it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic system.
■
During operation of the Climatronic, an increase in engine idle speed can oc-
cur under certain circumstances in order to ensure adequate heating comfort.
■
As soon as the windscreen mists up, press the symbol button
. Press the
button

once the windscreen has demisted.
Efficient handling of the cooling system
Read and observe and on page 85 first.
The air conditioning system compressor uses power from the engine when in
cooling mode, which will affect the fuel consumption.
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the
interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order
to allow the heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be on if the windows are open.
For the sake of the environment
Pollutant emissions are also reduced when fuel is saved » page 107.
malfunctions
Read and observe
and on page 85 first.
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5
°C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be.
›
One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse and replace if necessa-
ry » page 169.
›
The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because
the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot » page 32.
89
Heating and air conditioning
If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself, or if the cooler
output has reduced, switch off the cooling system and seek assistance from a
specialist garage.
Communication and multimedia
Universal telephone installation GSM II
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Introductory information 91
Phone Phonebook 91
Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 92
Symbols in the display 93
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system 93
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 94
ŠKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems
with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission
power of up to 10 watts.
Please consult a ŠKODA Partner for information about the possibility of instal-
ling and operating mobile phones and two-way radio systems with a transmis-
sion power of more than 10 W.
Operating mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with the
functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle.
This could be for the following reasons.
›
no external aerial.
›
external aerial incorrectly installed.
›
transmission power greater than 10 watts.
WARNING
■
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
■
The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be
observed.
■
If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in a vehicle with-
out an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incor-
rectly, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the
vehicle.
■
Two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts must not be installed
on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags.
90
Using the system
WARNING (Continued)
■
Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in any area
where it can become a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an
accident or a collision — risk of injury.
■
The Bluetooth
®
function must be switched off by a specialist company
before the vehicle can be transported by air.
Note
■
We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two-way radio
systems in a vehicle be carried out by a specialist garage.
■
Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth
®
communication are compatible
with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II. You can ask a ŠKODA Part-
ner whether your telephone is compatible with the GSM II universal telephone
fitting.
■
The range of the Bluetooth
®
connection to the hands-free system is restric-
ted to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obsta-
cles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your
mobile phone is in a jacket pocket, for example, this can lead to difficulties
when establishing a connection with the hands-free-system or transferring
data.
Introductory information
Read and observe on page 90 first.
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II (hands-free system) includes a
convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control, the multifunction
steering wheel, the radio or navigation system.
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following func-
tions.
›
Phone Phonebook » page 91.
›
Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering
wheel » page 92.
›
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display » page 94.
›
Voice control of the telephone » page 94.
›
Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 96.
All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle's hands-free sys-
tem is established with the help of Bluetooth
®
technology.
Phone Phonebook
Read and observe on page 90 first.
A phone phonebook is part of the hands-free system. This phone phonebook
can be used depending on the type of mobile phone.
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the
phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control
unit.
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-
free system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating
can take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored af-
ter the last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone num-
bers are only shown after the updating has ended.
The update is interrupted if a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call,
voice control dialogue) occurs during the updating procedure. After the tele-
phone event has ended, the updating starts anew.
The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations. Each contact
can contain up to 4 numbers.
If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not com-
plete.
91
Communication and multimedia
Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 87
Multifunction steering wheel: Control buttons for the telephone
Read and observe on page 90 first.
To minimize driver distraction when operating the telephone, the basic tele-
phone's functions can be set by simply operating the buttons located on the
steering wheel » Fig. 87.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal tele-
phone installation at the factory.
The buttons control the functions for the operating mode of the current tele-
phone.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
Button/
wheel » Fig. 87
Action Operation
1
Press briefly (MUTE )
1
Turn upwards Increase volume
1
Turn downwards Decrease volume
2
Press briefly
Accept a call/end a call
Display of the basic Phone menu →
a)
Main Phone menu → List of dialled numbers → Call selected contact
2
Press and hold button Reject the incoming call
3
Turn up/down Previous / next menu item
3
Press briefly Confirm selected menu item
3
Press and hold button Continuously display first letter of the phone book
3
Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book
3
Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book
4
Press briefly Return to a previous level in the menu
4
Press and hold button Exit telephone menu
a)
The symbol The → symbol means briefly press button again.
92
Using the system
Symbols in the display
Read and observe on page 90 first.
The following symbols are displayed in the MAXI DOT display:
Symbol Meaning
Charge status of the telephone battery
a)
Signal strength
a)
a phone is connected to the hands-free system.
The hands-free system is visible to other devices.
A multimedia unit is connected to the hands-free system.
a)
This function is only supported by some mobile phones.
Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system
Read and observe on page 90 first.
To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, the two devices must
be paired. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions
for your mobile phone.
The following steps must be carried out for pairing
1)
.
›
Activate Bluetooth
®
and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele-
phone.
›
Switch on the ignition.
›
Select the Phone - New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until
the hands-free system has completed the search.
›
Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found.
›
Confirm the PIN
2)
.
›
If the hands-free system announces (as standard SKODA_BT) on the display
of the mobile phone, enter the PIN
2)
within 30 seconds and wait, until the
connection is established
3)
.
›
To finish pairing in the MAXI DOT display, confirm the creation of the new
user profile.
If there is no free space available to create a new user profile, delete an exist-
ing user profile.
During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected
with the hands-free system.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands-free system, whereby
only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.
The visibility of the hands-free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes
after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile
phone has connected to the hands-free system.
Restoring the visibility of the hands-free system
If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free
system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition, the visibility of the
hands-free system can be re-established for 3 minutes in one of the following
ways.
›
By turning the ignition off and on.
›
By turning voice control off and on.
›
In the MAXI DOT display under menu item Bluetooth - Visibility.
Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for
the already paired mobile phone
3)
. Check on your mobile phone if the automat-
ic connection has been established.
Disconnecting the connection
The connection to a connected mobile phone can be ended in the following
ways.
›
By withdrawing the ignition key.
›
By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone.
›
By disconnecting from the user in the MAXI DOT display under the menu item
Bluetooth - User.
1)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
2)
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN (SSP)
is either displayed, or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually.
3)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth
®
connection
is completed by inputting a PIN number. If the authorisation input is required, it must always be per-
formed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
93
Communication and multimedia
Solving connection problems
If the hands-free system reports No paired phone found, check the operating
status of the mobile phone.
›
Is the mobile phone switched on?
›
Is the PIN code entered?
›
Is Bluetooth
®
active?
›
Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?
›
Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands-free system?
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
Read and observe on page 90 first.
The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu.
›
Phone book
›
Dial number
1)
›
Call register
›
Voice mailbox
›
Bluetooth
1)
›
Settings
2)
›
Back
Phone book
The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone
memory and the mobile phone SIM card.
Dial number
Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item. The re-
quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel
and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. You can select digits 0 - 9,
symbols
, , # and the Cancel, Call and Delete functions.
Call register
The following menu items can be selected in the Call register menu item.
■
Missed calls
■
Dialled numbers
■
Received calls
Voice mailbox
In the Voice mailbox menu item, you can set the number of the voice mailbox
1)
and then dial the number.
Bluetooth
The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item.
■
User - Overview of the stored telephones
■
New user - Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range
■
Visibility - Switches on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devi-
ces
■
Media player - Playback via Bluetooth
®
■
Active device - Connected device
■
Paired devices - List of paired devices
■
Find - Device search
■
Phone name - option to change the name of the phone (default SKODA_BT)
Settings
The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item.
■
Phone book - Phonebook
■
Update - Update the phone book
1)
■
List - Arrange the entries in the phone book
■
Surname - Arrange according to surname
■
Surname - Sort by contact name
■
Ring tone - Ring tone setting
Back
Return in the Start menu of the telephone.
Voice control
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Dialogue
95
Voice commands 95
1)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
2)
This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system.
94
Using the system
Dialogue
Fig. 88
Multifunction steering wheel:
Voice control
The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice com-
mands and to carry them out is called "dialogue". The system gives audible
feedback and guides you through the relevant functions if necessary.
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors.
›
Speak at a normal volume without intonation or excessive pauses.
›
Avoid poor pronunciation.
›
Close the doors, windows and sliding roof in order to reduce or eliminate dis-
turbing noise from outside.
›
It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that your voice is
louder than the increased surrounding noise.
›
During the dialogue, limit background noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers
talking at the same time.
›
Do not speak when the system is making an announcement.
The microphone for voice control is housed in the moulded headliner and di-
rected towards the driver and front passenger. Therefore, the driver and the
front passenger can operate the equipment.
Entering a phone number
The telephone number can be entered as a continuous sequence of numbers
spoken one after the other (the whole number at once) or in the form of digit
blocks (separated by short pauses). After each string of digits (separated by a
brief pause in speaking), all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by
the system.
The digits 0-9 and symbols +,
, # are permitted. The system does not recog-
nize any combination of connected numbers, e.g. "twenty-three".
Switching on voice control
Briefly press the button
1
» Fig. 88 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Switching off voice control
If the system is currently playing a message, the message that is currently be-
ing played must be terminated by briefly pressing button
1
» Fig. 88 on the
multifunction steering wheel.
If the system is expecting a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself
as follows.
›
With the CANCEL voice command.
›
Briefly press the button
1
» Fig. 88 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Note
■
The dialogue is immediately terminated in the event of an incoming call.
■
The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction
steering wheel with telephone control.
Voice commands
Basic voice commands
Voice command Action
HELP
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.
CALL XYZ
This command calls up the contact from the phone
book.
PHONE BOOK
After this command, for example, the phone book
can be repeated back to you, a voice entry for the
contact can be updated or deleted, etc.
CALL HISTORY Lists of dialled numbers, missed calls, etc.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command, a telephone number can be
entered to establish a connection with the reques-
ted party.
REDIAL
After this command the system calls the last dial-
led number.
MUSIC
a)
Play music from the mobile phone or another
paired device.
FURTHER OPTIONS
After this command the system offers additional
context-dependent commands.
95
Communication and multimedia
Voice command Action
SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth
®
, dialogue etc.
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
a)
On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the naviga-
tion system menu; refer to the » operating instructions for the Amundsen+ navigation system.
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Pardon?”, and a
new entry can be made. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After
the 3rd attempt the answer “Cancelled.” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Store voice recording of a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you
can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book -
Voice tag - Record menu item.
Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu
FURTHER OPTIONS.
Multimedia
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Music playback via Bluetooth
®
96
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering
wheel 96
AUX and MDI inputs (AUX and USB) 97
Music playback via Bluetooth
®
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II makes it possible to play back
music via Bluetooth
®
from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or
notebook.
To ensure that music can be played via Bluetooth
®
, you must first pair the de-
vice with the hands-free system in the Phone - Bluetooth - Media player
menu.
The music playback process is performed on the connected device.
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played
back via the hands-free system can be controlled with the remote con-
trol » page 95, Voice commands.
Note
The device being connected must support the Bluetooth
®
A2DP profile; refer
to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected.
Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 89
Multifunction steering wheel: Navigation control buttons
The multifunction steering wheel features buttons for operating the basic
functions for the factory-fitted radio and navigation system » Fig. 89.
The radio and the navigation system can of course still be operated via the de-
vices. A description is included in the relevant operating instructions.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel are illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio, au-
dio, video or navigation system.
The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons.
96
Using the system
Button/
wheel » Fig. 89
Action Radio Audio sources Navigation
1
Press Change audio source
2
Press Switch tone off/on (MUTE )
Interrupt current navigation an-
nouncement
2
Turn upwards Increase volume
2
Turn downwards Decrease volume
3
Press briefly
Skip to next channel Skip to next track No function
Interrupt traffic report
3
Press and hold button No function Fast forward No function
4
Press briefly
Switch to previous channel Switch to start of track
a)
No function
Interrupt traffic report
4
Press and hold button No function Fast rewind No function
5
Turn upwards
Switch to the previous station and at
the same time
display list of saved/available sta-
tions
Skip to next track
Show the option to stop navigation
or display the list of recent destina-
tions
5
Turn downwards
Switch to the next station and at the
same time
display list of saved/available sta-
tions
Switch to start of track
a)
6
Press briefly Call up the main menu
a)
To go to the previous track, press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions.
AUX and MDI inputs (AUX and USB)
Fig. 90 AUX input / MDI input (AUX and USB)
Depending on the equipment, your vehicle may have AUX or MDI inputs (AUX
and USB) for connecting external audio sources.
The inputs are used to connect external devices (e.g. MP3 player) as well as for
listening to music from these devices via the factory fitted radio or navigation
system.
For connecting Apple devices to the MDI input use a “USB extension cable and
a 3.5 mm jack” from the ŠKODA original accessories. Connected Apple devices
can be operated from this device.
A description of the inputs can be found in the relevant operating instructions
for the radio or navigation system.
97
Communication and multimedia
AUX input
For vehicles with an AUX input this depends on the equipment and is located
at one of the following locations.
›
Between the front seats in the centre console » Fig. 90 -
.
›
Above the storage box of the front centre console » Fig. 90 –
.
›
On the front of the Amundsen+ navigation system.
The AUX input is indicated with the lettering

.
Audio devices can be connected via the standard 3.5 mm jack plug to the input.
USB input
If vehicles are equipped with the USB input, this will be located above the stor-
age compartment in the front centre console » Fig. 90 -
.
The USB input is indicated with the symbol
.
USB devices can be connected at the input (such as storage sources).
SmartGate
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Connection with SmartGate
98
Smart Gate website 99
Password Management 99
SmartGate is a system which transmits vehicle data via Wi-Fi.
The ŠKODA applications installed in a connected communications device (e.g.
phone, tablet, notebook)
1)
offer the possibility to further process the received
data.
Available applications and further information can be found on the ŠKODA
website..
WARNING
■
The national legal regulations for using mobile communication devices in
a vehicle must be observed.
■
Do not fit the equipment or mounts to be connected onto airbag covers
or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags.
■
Never leave a connected device in the deployment area of an airbag, on a
seat, on the dash panel or any another area, from which it can be thrown
during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an accident or a collision - there is a
risk of injury.
Note
The Wi-Fi range is limited to the interior of the vehicle.
Connection with SmartGate
Read and observe on page 98 first.
For a successful connection the following conditions must be met.
Wi-Fi is turned on in the device to be connected.
The ignition is switched on.
Connect
›
Can enable the connected device to search for available Wi-Fi networks (see
operating instructions for the connected device).
›
In the found networks menu, select the connection to the
“SmartGate_ ... ”network
2)
.
›
Enter the password (the password is preset at the factory to the complete
Vehicle Identification Number - enter capital letters).
Disconnecting the connection
The connection to SmartGate can be ended in the following ways.
›
By disconnecting the connected device from SmartGate.
›
By turning off the Wi-Fi in the connected device.
›
By switching off the ignition and removing the key for more than 5 s (for ve-
hicles with starter button - by turning off the engine and opening the driver's
door).
1)
The applications support communication devices with the Android operating system version 4.0.x and
later and iOS 7.xx and higher.
2)
The last six symbols of the VIN vehicle identification number of your vehicle are displayed at position ....
98
Using the system
Automatic connection
The connection to SmartGate is automatically restored under the following
conditions.
Wi-Fi is turned on in the device to be connected.
The ignition is switched on.
The device to be connected stores the password required for the connec-
tion check.
Connection problems
If the connection fails, check the following points.
›
Are the conditions for a successful connection fulfilled?
›
Is Smart Gate available in the list of available Wi-Fi networks?
›
Has the password required for the connection check been entered?
›
Is the password is required for the connection check correct?
›
Is the device to be connected still connected to another Wi-Fi network?
If the above items are ok but the connection still fails, contact a ŠKODA part-
ner.
Note
Up to four devices can be connected to SmartGate at a time.
Smart Gate website
Read and observe on page 98 first.
There is a special website for the SmartGate system.
The following address must be entered in the web browser of the connected
device.
HTTP://192.168.123.1
This website contains information about the vehicle, the Wi-Fi connection and
SmartGate.
In the Configuration area the Wi-Fi connection settings can be adjusted.
Save the setting changes
The setting changes are only applied after performing the following steps.
›
The changes are saved by pressing the “Save” button.
›
SmartGate is restarted by pressing the “Reboot ”button.
Password Management
Read and observe on page 98 first.
Password management can be done in the connected device on the Smart-
Gate website» page 99, Smart Gate website.
The changes are applied after saving and restarting SmartGate » page 99,
Save the setting changes.
Change password
›
Enter a new password in the Configuration area in menu option WPA / WPA2
key.
The password must be 8-17 characters without diacritics or special characters
(for example, -, /, etc.).
Connection option without entering a password
›
In the Configuration area set the value Open in the menu item Security .
Forgot password
If you have forgotten your password, SmartGate must be reset to factory set-
tings in a specialized workshop.
99
Communication and multimedia
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and turning off the engine
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic immobilizer
100
Lock/unlock steering lock 101
Ignition on / off and start the engine 101
Switching off the engine 101
With the key in the ignition, the ignition can be switched on and off and the
engine can be started / stopped.
WARNING
■
While driving with the engine stopped, the ignition must always be
switched on » page 101, Ignition on / off and start the engine.
■
With the ignition off, the steering may lock » page 101 - danger of an
accident!
■
Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop » page 103, Parking. Otherwise, the steering could be
blocked – risk of accident!
■
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor-
ized persons, such as children, for example, could lock the car, turn on the
ignition or start the engine - there is a danger of injury, accidents and dam-
age!
■
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is
risk of accident, damage or theft!
■
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
WARNING
■
Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in a closed place - there is the dan-
ger of poisoning and death!
■
Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment.
This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■
Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a
cover) – risk of fire!
CAUTION
■
Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a danger of starter and engine damage!
■
Do not push-start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and
the catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a
jump-start aid » page 162.
Note
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this, the engine rea-
ches its operating temperature faster.
Electronic immobilizer
Read and observe
and on page 100 first.
The electronic immobilizer makes a possible attempted theft or unauthorized
use of your vehicle more difficult.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deac-
tivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the lock.
The engine will not start if a non-authorized ignition key is used.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.
Immobilizer active.
IMMOBILIZER
100
Driving
Lock/unlock steering lock
Read and observe and on page 100 first.
The steering lock (steering lock) deters any attempted theft of your vehicle.
Locking
›
Withdraw the ignition key.
›
Turn the steering wheel to the left or right until the steering lock clicks into
place.
Unlocking
›
Insert the key into the ignition lock.
›
Switch on the ignition » page 101.
The steering lock is unlocked.
If the ignition switch cannot be turned on, then turn the steering wheel back
and forth slightly and thereby unlock the steering lock.
Ignition on / off and start the engine
Fig. 91
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock
Read and observe and on page 100 first.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 91
Ignition switched off, engine switched off
Ignition switched on
Starting engine
Switching ignition on/off
›
Turn key to position
2
.
The ignition is switched on.
›
Turn key to position
1
.
1
2
3
The ignition is switched off.
Procedure for starting the engine
›
Firmly apply the handbrake.
›
For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts.
›
On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
›
Turn the key into position
3
to the stop and release immediately after the
engine has been started – do not apply the accelerator.
After letting go, the vehicle key will return to position
2
.
For vehicles with diesel engines the glow plug warning light
goes on during
starting. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes out.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position
1
. Re-
peat the start-up process after approx. half a minute.
Vehicles with the START-STOP system and manual gearbox
The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.
Depress clutch to start!
CLUTCH
Vehicles with the START-STOP system and automatic gearbox
The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed.
The following message is shown in the information cluster display.
Depress brake to start.
BRAKE
Note
■
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
■
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heat-
ing period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Switching off the engine
Read and observe
and on page 100 first.
›
Stop the vehicle » page 103, Parking.
›
Turn key to position
1
» Fig. 91 on page 101.
101
Starting-off and Driving
The engine and the ignition are switched off simultaneously.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P .
CAUTION
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to
run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumula-
tion of heat when the engine is switched off.
Note
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue to
operate for approx. 10 minutes.
Brakes and parking
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Information on braking
102
Handbrake
103
Parking
103
WARNING
■
Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
ed off – risk of accident!
■
The clutch pedal must be actuated when braking on a vehicle with man-
ual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise,
the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of accident!
■
When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who might, for example,
release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear unattended in the ve-
hicle. The vehicle could then start to move – risk of accident!
■
Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads » page 107, New
brake pads.
CAUTION
Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not nec-
essary. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer brak-
ing distance and excessive wear.
Information on braking
Read and observe and on page 102 first.
Wear-and-tear
The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv-
ing style.
The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns
and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted.
Under these severe conditions, the thickness of the brake pads must also be
checked by a specialist garage between service intervals.
Wet roads or road salt
The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake
pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter.
The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times »
.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has
been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking
system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times » .
Long or steep slopes
Before travelling a long distance with a steep gradient, reduce speed and shift
into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be
used, reducing the load on the brakes. Any additional braking should be com-
pleted intermittently, not continuously.
Emergency brake display
If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con-
siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic, the brake light
flashes automatically.
After the speed was reduced below around 10 km/h or the vehicle was stop-
ped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system
switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically af-
ter accelerating or driving off again.
Faults in the brake surface
If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that
the brake pedal can be depressed further, the brake system may be faulty.
Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri-
ately, as you will not know the exact extent of the damage.
102
Driving
Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system.
The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically » page 35,
Brake sys-
tem.
Brake booster
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake
discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users
in jeopardy.
Handbrake
Fig. 92
Handbrake
Read and observe and on page 102 first.
The hand brake is used when stopping and parking for securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
Apply
›
Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
Release
›
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking
button » Fig. 92 .
›
Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning light
lights up when the handbrake is applied, pro-
vided the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the
handbrake applied.
The following instruction is shown in the MAXI DOT display.
Release parking brake!
The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more
than around 6 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of acci-
dent!
Parking
Read and observe and on page 102 first.
When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » .
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order.
›
Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
›
Firmly apply the handbrake.
›
On vehicles with automatic transmission place the selector lever in the P po-
sition.
›
Switch off the engine.
›
On vehicles with manual transmission select the first gear or reverse gear.
›
Release the brake pedal.
WARNING
The parts of the exhaust system can become very hot. Therefore, never
stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come in-
to contact with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth,
leaves, spilled fuel or such like. - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur!
Manual gear changing and pedals
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manual gear changing 104
Pedals 104
103
Starting-off and Driving
Manual gear changing
Fig. 93
Gearshift pattern of 5 gear or
6 gear manual gearbox
On the shift lever, the individual gear positions are shown » Fig. 93.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 43.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
to the clutch.
Reverse gear is engaged
›
Stop the vehicle.
›
The clutch pedal is fully depressed.
›
Move the shift lever to the idle position switch and press down.
›
Move the shift lever fully to the left and then forward into R posi-
tion » Fig. 93.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
CAUTION
■
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear-
shift lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift
mechanism to wear excessively.
■
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the clutch and
the accelerator pedal – this may lead to damage to the clutch.
Pedals
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corre-
sponding attachment points may be used.
Only use factory-supplied footmats or footmats from the range of ŠKODAOrigi-
nal Accessories, which are fitted to two attachment points.
WARNING
No objects may be placed in the driver's footwell – risk due to obstruction
or limitation of pedal operation!
Automatic gearbox
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Modes and use of selector lever
105
Selector lever lock 105
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic) 106
Starting-off and driving 106
The automatic transmission performs automatic gear changes.
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.
WARNING
■
No throttle when it is set before starting the mode for moving forward
with the selector lever - there is a risk of accident!
■
Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of acci-
dent!
■
When the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running, the vehicle must
be held in mode D, S or R with the brake pedal. Even when the engine is
idling, the power transmission is never completely interrupted – the vehicle
crawls.
■
When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever is always to put in the P
mode. Otherwise the vehicle could then start to move and potentially cause
an accident.
104
Driving
CAUTION
■
If the selector lever is moved to mode N while driving, the accelerator pedal
must be released and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its
idling speed before moving the selector lever to a forward driving mode again.
■
When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when
starting must always be in P mode.
■
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Note
After the ignition is switched off, the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the
selector lever is in the position P.
Modes and use of selector lever
Fig. 94 Selection lever / lock button / display
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 94.
The following modes can be selected with the selector lever » Fig. 94.
P
– Parking mode
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode.
Parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary.
R
– Reverse gear
Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en-
gine is at idling speed.
N
– Neutral
The power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode.
D
- Mode for forwards travel (normal programme)
In mode D, the forward gears are automatically changed according to the en-
gine load, accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed.
S
- Mode for forwards travel (sports programme)
In mode S, the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher
engine speeds than in mode D.
Before changing to mode S from mode D, press the lock button in the direction
of arrow
1
» Fig. 94.
Fault in the automatic gearbox
A fault in the automatic gearbox is noticeable with the following.
›
Only certain gears are selected.
›
The reverse gear R cannot be used.
›
Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible.
CAUTION
If a fault occurs on the automatic gearbox help from a professional service pro-
vider should be sought immediately - there is a risk of damaging the vehicle.
Selector lever lock
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
The selector lever is locked in modes P and N to prevent the forwards travel
mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light
.
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N
(e.g. from R to D). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck,
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
pressed.
Releasing selector lever from mode P or N (selector lever lock)
›
Press the brake pedal and the lock button at the same time in the direction
of
1
» Fig. 94 on page 105 .
105
Starting-off and Driving
Just depress the brake pedal, if you would like to change from the mode N to
D.
Defective selector lever lock
If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted (e.g. dis-
charged vehicle battery, faulty fuse), the selector lever can no longer be moved
out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be driven.
The selector lever must be emergency released » page 167.
Note
If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa,
move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being acci-
dentally selected.
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
Fig. 95
Selector lever
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever.
This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the display » Fig. 94 on page 105.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 43.
Switching to manual shifting
›
Push the gear selector from mode D towards the right, or left in a right-hand
drive vehicle.
Shifting up gears
›
Push the selector lever forwards
+
» Fig. 95.
Shifting down gears
›
Push the selector lever backwards
-
» Fig. 95 .
Note
■
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and
hence the wear on the brakes » page 102, Information on braking.
■
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
■
If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no
risk of the engine over revving.
Starting-off and driving
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
Starting off
›
Start the engine.
›
Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
›
Press the lock button in the direction of
1
» Fig. 94 on page 105 and hold.
›
Move the selector lever into the desired position » page 105 and then release
the lock button.
›
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
Stopping (while the car is moving)
›
Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
›
Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
short time, such as at a cross roads.
Kickdown
The kickdown function allows you to achieve the maximum acceleration of
your vehicle while driving.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the kickdown function is activa-
ted in any forward driving mode.
The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed
and engine speed, and the vehicle accelerates.
The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has
reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range.
WARNING
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of vehicle
control – risk of accident!
106
Driving
Retraction and economical driving
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Driving in
107
Tips for economical driving 107
The fuel consumption, degree of pollution and vehicle wear depend on driving
style, road condition, weather conditions and the like.
Driving in
Driving in the engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres. During this peri-
od, the driving style decides on the quality of the driving-in process.
During the first 1,000 km we recommend not driving faster than 3/4 of the
maximum permissible engine speed, not to drive at full throttle and to dis-
pense with the trailer.
In the area of 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres the engine load can be increased up
to the maximum permitted engine speed.
New tyres
New tyres must firstly be “run in”, as they do not offer optimal grip at first.
Therefore, drive with special care for the first 500 km or so.
New brake pads
New brake pads have to first “grind in” because these do not initially have the
best possible braking effect.
Therefore, drive with special care for the first 200 km or so.
Tips for economical driving
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, the following instructions
must be observed.
Looking ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Switch in an energy saving and timely manner
Observe the recommended gear » page 43.
Avoid full throttle and high speeds
Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three-quarters of the pos-
sible top speed of your vehicle.
Reducing idling
When the engine is switched off, such as when waiting in a traffic jam, the fuel
economy is already greater after 30 - 40 s than the fuel quantity which is re-
quired for engine re-start.
Avoid short distances
When driving a short distance of less than about 4 km, the engine cannot
reach its operating temperature. As long as the engine has not reached oper-
ating temperature, the fuel consumption is significantly higher than with the
engine hot.
Pay attention to the correct tyre inflation pressure being maintained
Further information » page 149.
Avoid unnecessary ballast
Per 100 kg of weight, consumption increases by about 1 l/100 km. At a speed of
100-120 km/h, a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load
will use about 10 % more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic
drag.
Saving electricity
Electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating, air conditioning and the like) only turn
on for as long as necessary.
Driving through water and driving off of made-up roads
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Driving through water
108
Driving off paved roads 108
WARNING
Immediately after driving through water, mud, slush and the like, braking
effectiveness will be temporarily impaired » page 102, Information on brak-
ing . For this reason, sudden and violent braking manoeuvres are to be
avoided - there is a risk of accident!
107
Starting-off and Driving
Driving through water
Fig. 96
Maximum permissible water lev-
el when driving through water
Read and observe on page 107 first.
The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
›
Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of
water.
The water level must not reach above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 96.
›
Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed.
At a higher speed, a water wave can form in front of the vehicle, which can
cause water to penetrate into the engine's air induction system or other parts
of the vehicle.
›
Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
CAUTION
■
Should water penetrate into the intake system of the engine, there is a
threat of serious damage being incurred by the engine parts!
■
When driving through water, some vehicle parts such as chassis, electrics or
transmissions can be severely damaged.
■
Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
sible water level for your vehicle.
■
Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water, making it difficult or
impossible to drive through the body of water.
■
Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. An vehicle
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa-
ter.
Driving off paved roads
Read and observe on page 107 first.
Only drive on such roads and in such terrain, which match the vehicle parame-
ters » page 177, Technical data as well as your driving skills.
The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can handle
travelling in the given terrain.
WARNING
Drive particularly aware and pro-actively outside paved roads.
■
Always adjust your driving to the current terrain and weather conditions.
Excessive speed or incorrect driving manoeuvres can cause damage to the
vehicle and lead to serious injuries.
■
Objects trapped under the floor of the vehicle can damage the fuel lines,
the brake system, the seals and other parts of the chassis. Check the un-
derside of the vehicle and remove the trapped objects.
■
Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
CAUTION
■
Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob-
jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the chassis and its compo-
nents can get damaged.
■
Drive slowly in unknown terrain and watch out for unexpected obstacles,
such as potholes, rocks, stumps, etc.
■
Check up on confusing sections of unpaved roads before travelling on them
and consider whether such travelling is possible without risk.
108
Driving
Assist systems
Braking and stabilisation systems
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 109
Antilock Braking System (ABS) 109
Traction Control System (TCS) 109
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 110
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) 110
Hill Hold Control (HHC) 110
This chapter deals with the functions of the braking and stabilisation systems,
with the error indicator referred to in chapter » page 34, Indicator lights.
The braking and stabilisation systems are automatically activated each time
the ignition is switched on.
WARNING
■
A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to
shut down. The brake assist systems would then fail to function – risk of
accident!
■
The increased safety provided by the brake assist systems must not
tempt you to take safety risks – risk of accident!
■
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Fig. 97
Press the ESC system: Activat-
ing/deactivating TCS
Read and observe on page 109 first.
The ESC improves vehicle stability in dynamic driving situations, such as when
the vehicle starts to skid.
The ESC monitors whether the desired direction of the current vehicle motion
is occurring. In case of any deviation (e.g. oversteer), the ESC automatically
brakes individual wheels to maintain the desired direction.
During an intervention of the system, the warning light
flashes in the instru-
ment cluster.
The ESC system cannot be deactivated. The
» Fig. 97 button can only be
used to deactivate the TCS » page 109.
The warning light
lights up in the instrument cluster when the ASR is deacti-
vated.
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
only in the following situations, for example.
›
When driving with snow chains.
›
When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
›
When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Read and observe on page 109 first.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres-
sure on the brake pedal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Read and observe
on page 109 first.
TCS prevents the spinning of the wheels of the driven axle. TCS reduces the
drive power transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for
example, driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier.
If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system, the ASR is integrated into the ESC
system » page 109.
109
Assist systems
Note
For vehicles without stabilization control (ESC), during a TCS intervention the
control indicator in the instrument cluster flashes.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
Read and observe on page 109 first.
EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL
brakes the spinning wheel, if necessary, and transmits the driving force to the
other driving wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different
traction under each wheel of the driven axle.
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation
on the brake of the wheel being braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven
and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL. Once the
brakes have cooled down, there is an automatic re-activation of EDL.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
Read and observe
on page 109 first.
The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking dis-
tance.
The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap-
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is re-
leased.
Hill Hold Control (HHC)
Read and observe on page 109 first.
When driving on slopes, HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake ped-
al to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake.
The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake
pedal for approx. 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released.
The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator ped-
al. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
The HHC is active from a 5% slope if the driver's door is closed. HHC is only ev-
er active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off.
Parking aid
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Function 111
Activation/deactivation 111
The parking aid (hereinafter referred to only as a system) draws attention via
acoustic signals and an indication in the radio or navigation display when ma-
noeuvring around obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are integrated in the rear
bumper » Fig. 98 on page 111.
WARNING
■
The system only serves to support and does not relieve the driver of the
responsibility for the vehicle operation.
■
Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
■
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. For this reason, such people or
objects may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■
External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors. Un-
der adverse conditions, this may cause objects or people not to be recog-
nised by the system.
■
Before reversing, you should make sure that there are no small obstacles,
such as rocks, thin posts, trailer drawbars etc. behind your vehicle. Such ob-
stacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
CAUTION
■
Keep the system sensors clean, snow-and ice-free and do not cover with any
objects of any kind, otherwise the system functioning may be impaired.
■
Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or
high temperatures etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recog-
nition of obstacle”.
■
Additionally installed accessories such as e.g. bicycle carriers can impair the
system function.
110
Driving
Function
Fig. 98 Location of the sensors / range of the sensors
Read and observe
and on page 110 first.
Approximate range of sensors
Area » Fig. 98 Distance behind the vehicle (in cm)
A
160
B
60
Acoustic signals and display
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm - danger
area. From this moment on do not continue reversing!
Description of the indications in the radio or navigation system display, » the
radio instruction manual, navigation system user guide.
Activation/deactivation
Read and observe and on page 110 first.
The system is activated automatically by engaging the reverse gear. This is
confirmed by a brief audible signal.
The system is deactivated by disengaging reverse gear.
Displaying an error
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and
there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. Seek help
from a specialist garage.
Note
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the system cannot be activa-
ted when towing a trailer.
Cruise Control System
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functioning
111
Operating Description 112
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
actuate the accelerator pedal.
The state where the GRA maintains the speed is referred to hereinafter as the
control.
WARNING
■
The GRA only serves to support and does not relieve the driver of the re-
sponsibility for the vehicle operation.
■
Always adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weath-
er, road and traffic conditions.
Functioning
Read and observe on page 111 first.
Basic requirements for start of control
The GRA is activated.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher must
be engaged.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in
the D, S position or in the Tiptronic position.
The current speed must be higher than 20 km/hr.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output
and braking power of the engine.
111
Assist systems
WARNING
If the engine power and engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain
the set speed, vehicle operation must be taken over!
Operating Description
Fig. 99
Operating lever: Cruise control
system controls
Read and observe on page 111 first.
Overview of the control elements of the CCS » Fig. 99
A
 Deactivate CCS (delete stored speed)
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Activate CCS (control deactivated)
B
 Take control again
a)
/ Increase speed
C
 Launch control / reduce speed
a)
If no speed stored, the current speed is adopted.
After starting the system, the current speed is stored and the instrument clus-
ter lights up the indicator light
on.
After the interruption in control, the stored speed can be resumed by pressing
the
B
button.
Automatic control interruption
Automatic control interruption occurs if any of the following conditions are
met.
›
By pressing the brake or clutch pedal.
›
When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
›
Through an airbag deployment.
WARNING
■
Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
■
Control may only be resumed if the stored speed is not too high for the
current traffic conditions.
Note
During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re-
leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
START-STOP
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating conditions of the system
113
Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox 113
Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 113
System related automatic start-up 114
Manually deactivating/activating the system 114
Information messages 114
The START-STOP system (hereinafter referred to as the system) saves fuel and
reduces polluting emissions and CO
2
emissions by turning the engine off, e.g.
when stopping at traffic lights, and starting the engine again when moving off.
WARNING
■
Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.
■
The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run-
ning.
112
Driving
Operating conditions of the system
Fig. 100
MAXI DOT display: Engine is au-
tomatically switched off / auto-
matic engine cut off is not possi-
ble
Read and observe on page 112 first.
For system-dependent automatic engine shutdown
to work, the following conditions must be met.
The driver's door is closed.
The driver has fastened the seat belt.
The bonnet is closed.
The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after the last stop.
No trailer is coupled.
Some additional conditions for the system to function correctly cannot be in-
fluenced or recognised by the driver. Therefore, the system can react differ-
ently in situations which are identical from the driver's perspective.
If after stopping the car, the message START-STOP NOT POSSIBLE appears in
the segment display or the MAXI DOT display shows the
» Fig. 100 warning
sign, then the conditions for automatic engine shutdown are not being met.
Running the engine is essential for the following reasons, for example.
›
The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
›
The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
›
The current consumption is too high.
›
High air-conditioning or heating capacity (high fan speed, big difference be-
tween the desired and actual interior temperature).
Note
■
If the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in
direct sunlight, it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the
vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the
START STOP system.
■
If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than approx. 30 seconds or the
driver's door is opened during stop mode, the engine will have to be started
manually.
■
After the manual engine start and with a manual gearbox the automatic en-
gine shutdown can take place only when a minimum distance required for the
system function has been covered.
Operation in vehicles with manual gearbox
Read and observe
on page 112 first.
In compliance with the operating conditions, automatic engine shutdown / au-
tomatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shutdown
›
Stop the vehicle.
›
Put the gear stick into Neutral.
›
Release the clutch pedal.
Automatic engine shutdown takes place, segment display shows START-STOP
ACTIVE or the MAXI DOT display shows the warning sign
» Fig. 100 on
page 113.
Automatic engine start
›
Depress the clutch pedal.
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox
Read and observe
on page 112 first.
In compliance with the operating conditions, automatic engine shutdown / au-
tomatic engine start takes place as described.
Automatic engine shutdown
›
Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
113
Assist systems
Automatic engine shutdown takes place, segment display shows START-STOP
ACTIVE or the MAXI DOT display shows the warning sign » Fig. 100 on
page 113.
Automatic engine start
›
Release the brake pedal.
The automatic start procedure takes place again.
Further information on automatic transmission
The automatic engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in po-
sitions P, D, S and N and in Tiptronic mode.
When the selector lever is in position P, the engine remains shut down even
after you release the brake pedal. The engine starts automatically by pressing
the gas pedal or by moving the selector lever into a different mode and releas-
ing the brake pedal.
If the engine is off due to the automatic and the selector lever is put to the R
position then the automatic starts the engine.
If the gear selector is moved from position R to the position D, S or N, the vehi-
cle must reach a speed of more than 10 km / h before the automatic engine
shutdown starts.
There is no automatic engine shutdown when the system detects a vehicle
moving due to a large steering angle.
No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low
speed (e.g. during a traffic jam or when tuning) and remains stationary after
pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you
press the brake pedal down with more force.
System related automatic start-up
Read and observe on page 112 first.
When the engine is off, the system can automatically start the engine before
the desired journey continues. Some possible reasons for this are:
›
The vehicle begins to roll, e.g. on a slope.
›
The brake pedal has been actuated several times.
›
The current consumption is too high.
Manually deactivating/activating the system
Fig. 101
Button for the START-STOP sys-
tem
Read and observe on page 112 first.
Deactivating/activating
›
Press the symbol button
» Fig. 101.
When start-stop mode is deactivated, the warning light in the button lights up.
Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.
Information messages
Read and observe on page 112 first.
The warning icons are indicated in the display of the instrument cluster.
Start engine manually!
START MANUALLY
One of the conditions for automatic engine start is not satisfied or the driver's
seat belt is not fastened. The engine must be started manually.
Error: Start-Stop
ERROR START-STOP
A system error is present. Seek help from a specialist garage.
114
Driving
Tyre pressure monitoring
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Save tyre pressure values
115
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to only as a sys-
tem) monitors the tyre pressure while driving.
If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light
in the
instrument cluster illuminates and an audible signal sounds.
Information on the procedure for the notification of change of tyre inflation
pressure » page 40.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.
WARNING
■
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 149.
■
The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
Save tyre pressure values
Fig. 102
Key for storing the pressure val-
ues
Read and observe on page 115 first.
Saving the tyre pressure values is undertaken as follows.
›
Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
›
Switch on the ignition.
›
Press the symbol button
» Fig. 102 and hold.
The warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates.
An acoustic signal and the control indicator provide information about the
storage of the tyre pressure values.
›
Release the
symbol button.
The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system, if one of the follow-
ing events occurs.
›
Change of tyre inflation pressure.
›
Change one or more wheels.
›
Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
›
Illumination of the warning light
in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified in-
flation pressure » page 149. When storing incorrect pressure values, the
system could possibly not issue any warnings, even with a too low tyre
pressure.
CAUTION
The tyre pressure values are to be saved every 10,000 km or once annually to
ensure correct system functioning.
115
Assist systems
Hitch and trailer
Hitch
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description 116
Adjusting the ready position 117
A correctly set ready position 117
Assembling the bar ball - Step 1 118
Assembling the bar ball - Step 2 118
Check proper fitting 119
Removing the bar ball - Step 1. 119
Removing the bar ball - Step 2. 119
Accessories 120
The maximum trailer drawbar load is 50 kg.
WARNING
■
Check that the tow bar is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting
recess before the start of every journey.
■
Do not use the ball head, if it is not correctly inserted into the mounting
recess and secured.
■
Do not use the towing equipment if it is damaged or incomplete.
■
Do not modify or adapt the towing device in any way.
■
Never release the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled.
■
Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times.
Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
CAUTION
■
Take care with the ball bar - there is a risk of paint damage to the bumper.
■
When the tow bar is removed always place the cover onto the mounting re-
cess - there is a danger of soiling the mounting recess.
Note
■
Operation and maintenance of hitch » page 131.
■
The towing vehicle by means of the detachable ball rod » page 165.
Description
Fig. 103 Carrier for the towing device/tow bar
Read and observe
and on page 116 first.
The ball head can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel well or in a com-
partment for the spare wheel in the luggage compartment.
Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 103
Cap
Mounting recess
Dust cap
locking ball
Centering
Handwheel
Key
Lock cap
Red marking on the handwheel
Tow ball
Green marking on the handwheel
White marking on ball bar
Note
On the bottom of the key is a code number. If you lose a key, please contact a
specialist garage, who will be able to use this code number to provide you with
a new one.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
116
Driving
Adjusting the ready position
Fig. 104 Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock
Fig. 105 Setting the ready position
Read and observe and on page 116 first.
The tow bar must be set prior to installation to the standby posi-
tion » page 117, A correctly set ready position.
If this is not in the ready position, then this must be set to the standby posi-
tion as follows.
›
Grip the tow bar below the protective cap.
›
Remove the cover
A
from the lock in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 104.
›
Insert the key into the lock
B
in the direction of arrow
2,
so that the arrow
on the key symbol
shows.
›
Turn the key
B
to the stop in the direction of arrow
3,
so that the arrow on
the key symbol
» Fig. 105 shows.
›
Pull the hand wheel
C
in the direction of the arrow
4
and turn in the direc-
tion of the arrow
5
to the stop.
The hand wheel
C
remains locked in this position.
WARNING
If the tow bar cannot be correctly placed in the ready position, then it must
not be used.
A correctly set ready position
Fig. 106 Ready position
Read and observe
and on page 116 first.
Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 106
The key
A
is in the unlocked position - the arrow on the key points to the
symbol
.
The locking ball
B
can be pushed fully into the tow bar.
The red marking
C
on the hand wheel points to the white marking on the
ball bar.
There is a clear gap of approx. 4 mm
D
between the hand wheel and the
tow bar.
The ball bar is thus set ready for installation.
CAUTION
When in the ready position, the key cannot be removed from the lock.
117
Hitch and trailer
Assembling the bar ball - Step 1
Fig. 107 Remove cap for receiving shaft / use ball bar
Read and observe and on page 116 first.
Preliminary work
Before installing the tow bar the following work must be carried out.
›
Remove the end cap for receiving shaft
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 107.
The tow bar must be set to the standby position » page 117, A correctly set
ready position. If this is not in the standby position, then it must be set to the
standby position » page 117, Adjusting the ready position.
Fitting
›
Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 107 and insert into the mounting re-
cess in arrow direction
2
until you hear it click into place » .
The hand wheel
B
rotates back automatically and rests on the ball rod » .
WARNING
■
Do not hold the handwheel with your hand when attaching the ball bar -
there is a risk of finger injury.
■
If the tow bar is not in the ready position, it cannot be fitted in the
mounting recess.
Note
Store the cover of the mounting recess in a suitable place in the luggage com-
partment store after removal.
Assembling the bar ball - Step 2
Fig. 108 Secure the lock and remove key / place cap on lock
Read and observe
and on page 116 first.
›
First, perform step 1 of the ball rod assembly » page 118.
›
Turn the key
A
in the direction of arrow
1,
so that the arrow on the key
symbol
» Fig. 108 shows.
›
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
2
.
›
Fit the cap
B
on the lock in the direction of the arrow
3
.
›
Check that the tow bar is securely attached » page 119.
WARNING
■
After fitting the tow bar, always secure the lock and remove the key.
■
The tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted.
CAUTION
After removing the key, always replace the cover on the lock – there is a risk of
the lock getting dirty.
118
Driving
Check proper fitting
Fig. 109
Correctly secured ball head
Read and observe and on page 116 first.
Check that the tow bar is fitted properly before each use.
Correctly secured ball head » Fig. 109
The tow bar does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy
“shaking”.
The green marking
A
on the handwheel points to the white marking on
the tow bar.
The handwheel lies flush with the tow bar - there is no gap.
The lock is locked and the key is removed.
The cap
B
is on the lock.
WARNING
Do not use the towing device unless the tow bar has been properly locked!
Removing the bar ball - Step 1.
Fig. 110
Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock
Fig. 111
Unlock lock
Read and observe and on page 116 first.
›
Remove the cover
A
from the lock in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 110.
›
Insert the key into the lock
B
in the direction of arrow
2,
so that the arrow
on the key symbol
shows.
›
Turn the key
B
in the direction of arrow
3,
so that the arrow on the key
symbol
» Fig. 111 shows.
WARNING
Never remove the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled.
Note
We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before remov-
ing the tow bar.
Removing the bar ball - Step 2.
Fig. 112
Release ball bar
Read and observe and on page 116 first.
Removal
›
First, perform step 1 of the ball bar end assembly » page 119.
119
Hitch and trailer
›
Grasp the ball bar from below » Fig. 112.
›
Pull the hand wheel
A
in the direction of the arrow
1
.
›
Turn the hand wheel in the direction of the arrow
2
to the stop, and hold in
this position.
›
Remove the tow bar from the mounting recess downwards and in the direc-
tion of the arrow
3
.
At the same time, the ball head latches into the ready position and is thus
ready to be re-inserted into the mounting recess » .
Subsequent steps
After removing the tow bar the following work must be carried out.
›
Fit the cover for the mounting recess
A
in the opposite direction to arrow
1
» Fig. 107 on page 118.
WARNING
Never allow the tow bar to remain unsecured in the boot. This could cause
damage on sudden braking, and could put the safety of the occupants at
risk!
CAUTION
■
If the hand wheel
A
is not turned all the way to the stop, then it will return
to its initial position when the tow bar is removed and will rest on the tow bar
and not engage into the ready position. The ball head then needs to be
brought into this position before the next time it is fitted » page 117, Adjusting
the ready position.
■
The mounting recess must be closed with the cover following removal. This
prevents foreign bodies from getting into the mounting recess.
Note
Clean any dirt from the tow bar before stowing it away in the box with the ve-
hicle tool kit.
Accessories
Fig. 113
Representation of the maximum
permissible level of the ball head
of the towing hitch and the per-
missible total weight of the ac-
cessories including the load de-
pending on the load center of
gravity
Read and observe and on page 116 first.
An accessory can mounted on the ball head of the towing hitch (e.g. bike carri-
ers).
If this accessory is used, the maximum permissible overhang of the ball head
of the towing hitch and the permissible gross vehicle weight of the accesso-
ries including load are to be checked.
The maximum permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing hitch is 70
cm » Fig. 113.
The total permitted weight of the accessory including load changes with in-
creasing distance of the centre of gravity of the load from the ball head of the
towing hitch.
Distance of the centre of gravity of
the load from the ball head
Permissible total weight of the ac-
cessory, including load
0 cm 50 kg
30 cm 50 kg
60 cm 25 kg
70 cm 0 kg
WARNING
■
Never exceed the permissible gross weight of the accessory including
load - there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch.
■
Never exceed the permissible overhang of the ball head of the towing
hitch - there is a risk of damaging the ball head of the towing hitch.
120
Driving
Note
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Trailer
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Attaching and detaching trailers
121
Loading a trailer 122
Towing a trailer 122
Anti-theft alarm system 122
If your vehicle has already been factory-fitted with a towing device or is fitted
with a towing device from ŠKODA Original Accessories, then it meets all of the
technical requirements and national legal regulations for towing a trailer.
Note
If there is an error in the trailer lighting, check the fuses in the fuse box in the
dash panel » page 169.
Attaching and detaching trailers
Fig. 114
Swivel out the 13-pin power
socket, safety eyelet
Coupling
›
Install the tow bar.
›
Lift off protective cap
3
» Fig. 103 on page 116 towards the top.
›
Place the trailer onto the ball.
›
Grip the 13-pin socket on the handle
A
and swing out in the direction of the
arrow » Fig. 114.
›
Insert the trailer cable into the 13-pin socket.
If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable
adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories to establish a connection to the elec-
tricity.
›
Hook the breakaway cable of the trailer to the security lock slot
B
.
The breakaway cable of the trailer has to sag when mounted into the security
lock slot for all trailer positions relative to the vehicle (sharp curves, reverse
driving and the like).
Uncoupling
The uncoupling of the trailer is carried out in reverse order.
›
Unhook the breakaway cable of the trailer from the security lock slot
B
» Fig. 114.
›
Pull the trailer cable out of the 13-pin socket.
›
Remove the trailer from the ball head.
›
Place the cover
3
on the ball head » Fig. 103 on page 116.
›
Grip the 13-pin socket on the handle
A
and swing in the opposite direction
to the arrow » Fig. 114.
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see
the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. The national
legal requirements must be observed.
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being towed and the head-
lights may dazzle other road users.
Adjust the headlights using the headlight beam control » page 59.
WARNING
■
Incorrectly or improperly connected electrical installations may cause mal-
function of the entire vehicle electronics and lead to accidents and serious
injury from electric shock.
■
Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist ga-
rages.
■
Never directly connect the trailer's electrical system with the electrical
connections for the tail lights or other current sources.
■
After coupling the trailer and connecting up the power socket, check the
rear lights on the trailer to ensure they are working.
■
The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and
uncoupling the trailer.
■
Never use the safety eyelet for towing!
121
Hitch and trailer
Loading a trailer
The vehicle/trailer combination must be balanced, whereby the maximum per-
missible drawbar load must be utilised. If the drawbar load is too low, it jeop-
ardises the performance of the vehicle/trailer combination.
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the axle as possible. Secure the items from slipping.
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving
with this combination.
Tyre pressure
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a “full load” » page 149.
Towing capacity and trailer weight
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan-
ces » page 177, Technical data.
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1 000 metres above
mean sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the vehicle's climbing
power. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maximum
permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehi-
cle and the loaded trailer.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing de-
vice is merely a test value for the towing device. The vehicle-specific values
are detailed in the vehicle documents.
WARNING
■
The maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the permissible
weight of the trailer must not exceed - this could cause an accident!
■
A sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safe-
ty - there is a risk of accident!
Towing a trailer
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive faster than 80 km/h when towing a trailer.
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by acceler-
ating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake.
Engine overheating
If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand
area or the red area of the scale, the speed must be reduced immediately.
Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light
illuminates or starts to
blink in the instrument cluster.
The following guidelines must be observed » page 36.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
WARNING
■
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
■
Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
situation.
CAUTION
If you tow a trailer frequently, you should also have your vehicle inspected be-
tween service intervals.
Anti-theft alarm system
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is activated when the electrical connec-
tion to the trailer is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or un-
coupled » page 53.
122
Driving
Conditions for including a trailer in the anti-theft alarm system.
The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and towing
device.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer
socket.
The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional.
The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm system
is activated.
CAUTION
For technical reasons, trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the
anti-theft alarm system.
123
Hitch and trailer
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
124
Statutory checks 124
ŠKODA Service Partners 125
ŠKODA Original parts 125
ŠKODA Original accessories
125
Spoiler 126
Airbags 126
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 127
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when
carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. After carrying out modifi-
cations, repairs or technical alterations, the vehicle will comply with German
road transport regulations (StVZO).
Always consult a ŠKODA Partner » page 125 before buying accessories or
parts, or before carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations
to your vehicle.
WARNING
■
Work on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofessionally, can
cause operational faults – risk of accident!
■
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to
operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected
systems because of the networking of the electronic components. The op-
erational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to in-
creased wear of parts.
For the sake of the environment
Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be
kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later
date. This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound
manner.
Note
■
We recommend only having these modifications and technical alterations
carried out by a specialist garage.
■
Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of
the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty » Service schedule.
■
The ŠKODA Partner accepts no liability for products that have not been ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s. even though these may be products with an op-
erational approval or that have been approved by a government testing insti-
tute.
■
We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original
Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability,
safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
■
ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be purchased from
ŠKODA Partners, who will also perform the professional assembly of the pur-
chased parts.
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
Read and observe
on page 124 first.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its
intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA Partner.
He will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full
functioning of the vehicle as well as to prevent damage.
This involves, for example, the coolant, battery replacement and the like.
Statutory checks
Read and observe on page 124 first.
Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability and road-
worthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at specific
intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that
have been legally authorized for this purpose.
124
General Maintenance
The ŠKODA Service Partners are up-to-date on the legally required tests and
will prepare the vehicle for the tests as part of a service operation if required,
or will be responsible for carrying out these tests. The specialist garages can
carry out the specified tests directly if required by the customer if they are au-
thorised to do so. This saves you time and money.
Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for
prior checking in preparation of a legally required test, we recommend that you
consult the service consultant of your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand.
Based on their appraisal, the service consultant will tell you which areas you
should focus on in order to ensure that your vehicle will pass the technical test
without any problems. This allows you to avoid additional expenses resulting
from a possible subsequent test.
ŠKODA Service Partners
Read and observe on page 124 first.
ŠKODA Service Partners feature modern, specially developed tools and equip-
ment. Here, trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of
ŠKODA Original Parts and ŠKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifi-
cations, repairs and technical alterations.
All ŠKODA service partners operate according to the most recent guidelines
and instructions from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instruc-
tions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a
good technical condition.
ŠKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle
and to provide quality work. We therefore advise you to have all modifications,
repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
ŠKODA Original parts
Read and observe
on page 124 first.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO a.s.. They correspond precisely to the
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. regulations with regard to design, dimensional accuracy and
material, and are identical to the components used in series production.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. is able to vouch for the safety, suitability and long service life
of these products. We therefore recommend that you only use ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. supplies the market with a complete range of ŠKODA Genu-
ine Parts - not only while the model is still in production but for at least 15
years after the end of series production for wear parts and at least 10 years
after the end of series production for all other vehicle parts.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement. You should keep the ap-
proved warranty certificate and the invoices for these components for this pe-
riod of time, so that the commencement of the term can be verified.
Body repairs
ŠKODA vehicles are designed such that if any damage occurs to the body, it is
only necessary to replace those parts that are actually damaged.
However, before you decide to have damaged body parts replaced, you should
first of all contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not the parts
can also be repaired. Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper.
ŠKODA Original accessories
Read and observe on page 124 first.
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
ing:
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. has selected these accessories to ensure that they are relia-
ble, safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly moni-
tor the market, we are not able to assess or vouch for other products even
though in some instances such parts may have operational approval or may
have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
All accessory products are subjected to a challenging process in the areas of
technical development (technical testing) and quality inspection (customer
testing), and the product only becomes a ŠKODA Genuine Accessory if all tests
are passed.
Our ŠKODA Genuine Accessories service also includes expert advice and pro-
fessional fitting if required by the customer.
125
Care and maintenance
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Accesso-
ries for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with the
materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement
or any other agreements. You should keep the approved warranty certificate
and the invoices for these accessories for this period of time, so that the com-
mencement of the term can be verified.
ŠKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care products and all
parts that are subject to natural wear-and-tear, such as tyres, batteries, bulbs
and wiper blades.
Note
The accessories authorized by the company ŠKODA AUTO a.s. will be offered
by the ŠKODA Partners in all countries where the company ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
has a sales and after-sales service network. This will usually be in the form of a
printed catalogue of ŠKODA Genuine Accessories, in the form of separate prin-
ted brochures or in the form of ŠKODA Genuine Accessories on the ŠKODA
Partner websites.
Spoiler
Read and observe on page 124 first.
If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination
with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid, the following instructions
must be adhered to.
›
For safety reasons, the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front
bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart-
ment lid.
›
This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own, in
combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in
combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
›
We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any repairs
to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
WARNING
■
If work on your vehicle's spoilers is not carried out properly, this can lead
to operational faults - risk of accident and serious injuries!
■
If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
The front brakes may overheat, which can have a negative impact on the
functioning of the braking system – risk of accident!
Airbags
Read and observe on page 124 first.
The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front
bumper, doors, front seats, roof lining or body.
WARNING
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■
Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
■
The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.
Airbag modules cannot be repaired.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
■
It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
■
Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed
from old cars or have been recycled.
■
Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle. The airbags may then
not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident.
■
No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system.
WARNING
■
A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
proved wheels and tire combinations, can alter the functioning of the air-
bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
■
Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork.
126
General Maintenance
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles
Read and observe on page 124 first.
ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to
protecting the environment and the preserving resources. All new ŠKODA ve-
hicles can be utilized up to 95 % and always
1)
be returned free of charge.
In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been created, where you
can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will receive a
confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regula-
tions.
Note
You can find more detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old
cars from a specialist garage.
Washing vehicle
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Washing by hand
127
Automatic car wash systems 128
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner 128
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust,
tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to
the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect
can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, ac-
centuate this caustic effect.
It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking sys-
tem can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
CAUTION
The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 °C – risk
of damaging the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose.
Washing by hand
Read and observe and on page 127 first.
Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible.
Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove or a washing brush.
Work from the top to the bottom – starting with the roof.
For stubborn dirt, agents specifically intended for this purpose are to be used.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such
areas.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
WARNING
Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when cleaning
the underfloor or the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims – risk
of cuts!
CAUTION
■
Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle's paintwork.
■
Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight – risk of paint damage.
1)
Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.
127
Care and maintenance
Automatic car wash systems
Read and observe and on page 127 first.
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
in an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilt-
ing roof etc.).
If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler,
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of
the car wash system beforehand.
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the lips of the wipers should be
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de-
greased.
CAUTION
Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle in
an automatic car wash system. Never manually fold in electric exterior mirrors -
always use the electric controls.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Read and observe
and on page 127 first.
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This applies in particular to the pres-
sure used and to the spraying distance.
Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft mate-
rials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
CAUTION
■
If washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high-pressure cleaner,
ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the
door/panel joints – risk of freezing!
■
To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high-pressure
cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short pe-
riods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed.
Note
See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high-pressure clean-
er » page 130.
Cleaning vehicle exterior
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle paint work
129
Plastic parts 129
Rubber seals 129
Chrome parts 129
Decorative films 130
Windows and external mirrors 130
Headlight glasses 130
Door closing cylinder 131
Cavity protection 131
Jack 131
Wheels 131
Towing device and mounting recess 131
Under-body protection 131
Wiper blades 132
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
age must be observed.
WARNING
■
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
■
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com-
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
■
Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when clean-
ing the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims –
risk of cuts!
CAUTION
■
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
■
Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
128
General Maintenance
For the sake of the environment
Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to
the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal
regulations.
Note
Due to the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any potential
problems with the cleaning and care of your vehicle's exterior, we recommend
that the cleaning and care of your vehicle be carried out by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
Vehicle paint work
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Preserving the vehicle paintwork
A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle's paintwork with highly effec-
tive protection against harmful environmental influences.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest,
when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body-
work after it has dried thoroughly.
Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat
the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.
Polishing
Polishing is necessary if the vehicle's paintwork has become unattractive and
if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives.
If the polish does not contain any preserving elements, the paint must be trea-
ted with a preservative afterwards.
CAUTION
■
Paint damage is to be repaired immediately.
■
Never apply wax to the windows.
■
Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or
hard waxes.
■
Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
■
Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
■
If possible, do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork
that come into contact with door seals or window guides.
Plastic parts
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth.
If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts, use cleaning prod-
ucts specially designed for this purpose.
CAUTION
Do not use paint care products on plastic parts.
Rubber seals
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
All door seals and window guides are factory-treated with a colourless matt
varnish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect
against driving noise.
CAUTION
■
Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products whatsoev-
er.
■
Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coat-
ing, and driving noise may occur.
Chrome parts
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a
soft, dry cloth.
If this method does not completely clean chrome parts, use a specific chrome
care product.
CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment - risk of surface
scratches.
129
Care and maintenance
Decorative films
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean, warm water.
The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with
a high-pressure cleaner.
›
The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be
50 cm.
›
Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface.
›
The maximum water temperature is 50 °C.
›
The maximum water pressure is 80 bar.
CAUTION
■
Never use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents for the glued sur-
faces with films - there is a danger of film damage.
■
In the winter months, do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from
the areas with films. Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of
snow or ice – risk of film damage.
Windows and external mirrors
Fig. 115
Fuel filler flap: Remove ice scra-
per
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Removing snow and ice
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir-
rors.
The ice scraper can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
›
Open the fuel filler flap.
›
Slide out the ice scraper in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 115.
Cleaning windows
Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water.
Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this
purpose.
CAUTION
Instructions for removing snow and ice
■
The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc-
tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass.
■
Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel, sand or
salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors – there is a risk of
damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors.
■
Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water – risk of
cracks forming in the glass.
■
Make sure that when removing snow and ice from the windows, the labels
attached to the vehicle by the factory are not damaged.
CAUTION
Information for cleaning windows
■
Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp-edged objects or corro-
sive and acidic cleaning agents – there is a risk of damaging the heating ele-
ments or window aerial.
■
When drying the windows after washing the vehicle, do not use window
leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork. Residues of preserva-
tives in the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility.
Headlight glasses
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean, warm water and soap.
CAUTION
■
The headlights are never to be wiped dry - there is a risk of damaging the
protective lacquer and the headlight glass subsequently developing cracks.
■
Do not use sharp objects to clean the glasses - there is a risk of damaging
the protective lacquer and the headlight glasses subsequently developing
cracks.
■
Do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products to clean the
headlights – risk of damaging the headlight lenses.
130
General Maintenance
Door closing cylinder
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Specific products must be used for de-icing door lock cylinders.
CAUTION
Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder when
washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!
Cavity protection
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re-applied.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
um cleaner.
WARNING
Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re-
move wax – risk of fire!
Jack
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
The jack is maintenance-free.
If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should be lubricated with a suitable
lubricant.
Wheels
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Wheel rims
Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular
basis.
Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion, otherwise the rim material will be
corroded.
Light alloy wheels
After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product
for light alloy wheels.
For the treatment of wheel rims do not use products which may cause damage
to the paint on the rims.
CAUTION
■
Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediate-
ly.
■
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This
may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the
steering wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of
the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
Towing device and mounting recess
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Close the mounting recess with the cover to prevent any dirt from getting in.
If dirt is present, clean the inner surfaces of the mounting recess and treat
with a suitable preservative.
Always check the ball head before hitching a trailer. Apply a suitable grease, if
necessary.
Use the protective cover when stowing away the tow bar, in order to stop the
boot from getting dirty.
CAUTION
Apply grease to the inner part of the mounting recess. Make sure you do not
remove any grease.
Under-body protection
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory
against chemical and mechanical influences.
It is not possible to guarantee that the protective coating will not suffer any
damage as the vehicle is driven.
131
Care and maintenance
We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the
chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
winter.
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for ex-
haust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filters or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances may
ignite - risk of fire!
Wiper blades
Read and observe and on page 128 first.
Clean the wiper blades regularly with a glass cleaner. The wiper blades should
be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues,
for example.
The wiper blades can become soiled with wax residues after washing in auto-
matic vehicle wash systems for example » page 128.
Interior care
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Natural leather
132
Artificial leather, materials and Alcantara
®
133
Seat covers
134
Safety belts 134
We recommend using vehicle care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These are available from ŠKODA Partners. The usage instructions on the pack-
age must be observed.
WARNING
■
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
■
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not com-
pletely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
■
Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera-
ture inside the vehicle is high.
CAUTION
■
Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible
stains on the material (leather), panels and textiles.
■
Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
polish, etc., from the material (leather), panels and textiles as quickly as possi-
ble.
■
Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – there is a risk of
damage to the dash panel.
■
Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk of
damage.
■
Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
of the panelling.
■
Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned.
■
Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product.
For the sake of the environment
Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to
the environment. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal
regulations.
Note
Due to the special tools and knowledge required, and to avoid any potential
problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle, we recom-
mend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a
ŠKODA service partner.
Natural leather
Read and observe and on page 132 first.
The leather needs, depending on the strain placed on it, regular cleaning and
maintenance.
132
General Maintenance
Dust and dirt in pores and creases cause abrasions on the surface and lead to
premature embrittlement of the leather surface. Therefore, they must be re-
moved regularly at short intervals with a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water-dampened cotton or woollen cloth
and then dry with a clean, dry cloth » .
Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution (2 ta-
blespoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water).
To remove stains, use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose.
Treat the leather periodically with a suitable leather protector and use a skin
care cream with light blocker and impregnation after each cleaning.
CAUTION
■
Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that
no water gets into the seams. Otherwise, the leather could become brittle or
cracked.
■
Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the
leather from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods,
protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it.
■
The use of an additional mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the
leather surface of the steering wheel.
■
Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
fastness of the clothing textiles.
■
Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp-
edged belts etc may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the sur-
face or damage these. Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as a
justified complaint.
Note
When using the vehicle, minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts
of the covers (e.g. wrinkles or creases) as a result of the stress applied to the
covers.
Artificial leather, materials and Alcantara
®
Read and observe and on page 132 first.
Artificial leather
Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth.
If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather, use a mild soap
solution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose.
Fabric
Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors, boot cover, etc. us-
ing specific cleaning agents, e.g., dry foam.
Use a soft sponge, brush, or commercially available microfibre cloth.
Use a cloth and a cleaning agent specifically designed for this purpose to clean
the roof trim.
Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush.
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning glove”.
Alcantara
®
Dust and dirt in pores, creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface.
Therefore, they must be removed regularly at short intervals with a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal.
CAUTION
■
For Alcantara
®
seat covers, do not use any solvents, floor wax, shoe cream,
stain remover, leather cleaners or similar agents.
■
Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order
to stop the artificial leather, materials or Alcantara
®
from bleaching. During ex-
tended periods of standing outdoors, protect artificial leather, fabrics or Alcan-
tara
®
by covering.
■
Some clothing materials, e.g. dark denim, do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers,
even when used correctly. This applies particularly to light-coloured seat cov-
ers. This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover, but rather to poor colour
fastness of the clothing textiles.
133
Care and maintenance
Seat covers
Read and observe and on page 132 first.
Electrically heated seats
Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the cov-
ers. » .
Seats without seat heating
Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning.
Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially de-
signed for this purpose.
Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use, can be removed by
brushing against the direction of hair with a damp brush.
Always clean all parts of the covers, so that there are no visible edges. Then
allow the seat to dry completely.
CAUTION
■
Do not clean the covers of electrically heated seats either with water or with
other liquids - there is a risk of damaging the seat heating system.
■
Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner.
■
Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the
heater.
■
Do not sit on wet seats - risk of seat deformation.
■
Always clean the seats “from seam to seam”.
Safety belts
Read and observe
and on page 132 first.
Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water.
Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush.
WARNING
■
The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
■
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
■
The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive
liquids (e.g. acids).
■
The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up.
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Refuelling 135
Lead-free petrol 135
Diesel fuel 136
The correct fuel grades for your vehicle are specified on the inside of the fuel
filler flap » Fig. 116 on page 135.
CAUTION
■
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and
the exhaust system.
■
Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage!
■
If the vehicle was not purchased in the country where it was intended to be
operated, you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is
offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated. You should also per-
haps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel for
operation of the vehicle in the corresponding country. If no prescribed fuel is
available, then you must check whether it is permitted by the manufacturer to
operate the vehicle with another fuel type.
134
General Maintenance
Refuelling
Fig. 116 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
Read and observe
on page 134 first.
Refuelling can be done if the following conditions are met.
The vehicle is unlocked.
The engine and the ignition are switched off.
›
Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 116.
›
Open the flap in the direction of the arrow
2
.
›
Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of the arrow
3
.
›
Remove the tank cap and place on top of the fuel filler flap in direction of ar-
row
4
.
›
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go » .
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time » .
›
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the
pump.
›
Screw in the tank cap in the opposite direction of the arrow
3
until it audibly
clicks into place.
›
Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly.
WARNING
■
Do not smoke when refuelling and do not use a mobile phone.
■
The fuel and fuel vapours are explosive - it can be fatal!
■
Observe the local regulations regarding fuel handling.
WARNING
Instructions for filling the reserve canister
■
Never fill the reserve can inside the vehicle.
■
Never place the reserve can on the vehicle.
■
Always place the reserve can on the floor.
■
The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare can-
ister in the vehicle.
■
We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safe-
ty reasons. in the event of an accident, these canisters can become dam-
aged and fuel may escape – risk of fire!
CAUTION
■
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Not continue refuelling.
■
Be careful when filling diesel fuel from the spare canister and then do this
slowly and cautiously – danger of contaminating the body.
Note
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres, containing a reserve of approx.
7 litres.
Lead-free petrol
Read and observe on page 134 first.
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol that meets the EN 228
1)
standard.
All petrol engines can be operated using petrol that contains at most 10% bio-
ethanol (E10).
1)
In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.
135
Inspecting and replenishing
Required fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON. Unleaded petrol with the
octane ratings 91, 92 or 93 RON can also be used, but may result in a slight
loss in performance and slightly increased fuel consumption » .
Prescribed fuel – unleaded petrol min. 95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON or higher.
If unleaded gasoline is not available with the octane number 95 RON, in an
emergency petrol with the octane rating of 91, 92 and 93 RON can be used to
fill the tank, but this leads to a slight loss of performance and a slightly in-
creased fuel consumption » .
Prescribed fuel – unleaded petrol 98/(95) RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON or higher. Unleaded petrol
95 RON can also be used but this results in a slight loss in performance and
slightly increased fuel consumption.
In case of an emergency, you can refuel with petrol with the octane ratings 91,
92 or 93 RON, if unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not
available » .
Fuel additives
Unleaded petrol in accordance with the EN 228 standard
1)
meets all the condi-
tions for a smooth-running engine. We therefore recommend that no fuel ad-
ditives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine
or the exhaust system.
CAUTION
■
Even filling the tank with petrol that does not meet the standards once can
lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system!
■
If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is used by mistake, do not start the engine or
switch on the ignition! Extensive damage to engine parts can occur!
CAUTION
■
If, in an emergency, the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower oc-
tane number than the one prescribed, the journey must only be continued at
medium engine speeds and a low engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a
high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the
prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
■
Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the
one prescribed is used.
■
Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91
RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
CAUTION
In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used, especially not
with manganese and iron content. There is a risk of causing considerable
damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system!
CAUTION
Fuels with metal components, such as LRP (lead replacement petrol) should
not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the
engine or exhaust system!
Note
■
Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
■
On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91, 92 or 93 RON, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticea-
ble power increase or a lower fuel consumption.
■
On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of pet-
rol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and re-
duce fuel consumption.
Diesel fuel
Read and observe on page 134 first.
The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 590
2)
standard.
1)
In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.
2)
In Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590:2004.
136
General Maintenance
All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with at most 7% biodiesel
(B7)
1)
.
Operation in winter – Winter-grade diesel fuel
In the cold season, only use “winter-grade diesel fuel” which will still operate
properly even at a temperature of -20 °C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel
fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. ŠKODA Partners
and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with in-
formation regarding the diesel fuels available.
Diesel fuel additives
The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the con-
ditions for a smooth running engine. We therefore recommend that no diesel
fuel additives are used. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine or the exhaust system.
CAUTION
■
Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the
standard, can cause severe damage to parts of the engine, the fuel and ex-
haust system!
■
If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the
ignition! Extensive damage to engine parts can occur!
■
Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults.
CAUTION
■
The vehicle cannot be operated with bio fuel RME, therefore this fuel must
not be filled in the tank and used for driving the vehicle. The use of biofuel
RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system.
■
Do not mix any fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
agents) into the diesel. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the
engine or the exhaust system.
Engine compartment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening and closing the bonnet
138
Engine compartment overview 139
Radiator fan 139
Windscreen washer system 139
WARNING
Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in
the engine compartment. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the
warning instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety
rules. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area!
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
■
Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key.
■
Firmly apply the handbrake.
■
For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
■
On vehicles with automatic transmission, shift the selector lever into the
P position.
■
Allow the engine to cool.
■
Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until no more steam or coolant
is escaping.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment
■
Keep all people, especially children, away from the engine compartment.
■
Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm. The fan might
suddenly start running!
■
Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
1)
In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.
137
Inspecting and replenishing
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning
■
Pay particular attention to moving engine parts, e.g. V-ribbed belt, gener-
ator, radiator fan - danger to life!
■
Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
■
Avoid short circuits in the electrical system – particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
■
Always make sure that no jewellery, loose clothing or long hair can get
caught in rotating engine parts – risk to life! Always remove any jewellery,
tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any
work.
WARNING
Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system
■
Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system.
■
Do not smoke.
■
Never work near open flames.
■
Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby.
WARNING
■
Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid
containers.
■
Keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe from peo-
ple who are not completely independent, e.g. children.
■
Never spill operating fluids over the hot engine - risk of fire.
■
If you intend to work underneath the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle
from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks; the car
jack is not sufficient – risk of injury!
CAUTION
Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. This may result in major
operating problems and also vehicle damage!
For the sake of the environment
In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids
and the special tools and knowledge required for such work, we recommend
that fluids be changed by a specialist garage.
Note
■
Please consult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids.
■
Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Origi-
nal Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 117
Opening the bonnet
Read and observe and on page 137 first.
Open flap
›
Open the front door.
›
Pull the release lever underneath the dash panel in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 117.
Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers
are correctly in place against the windscreen, otherwise the paintwork on the
flap could be damaged.
›
Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow
2
.
The flap is then unlocked.
138
General Maintenance
›
Grasp the bonnet catch and lift in the direction of arrow
3
.
›
Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow
4
from the holder.
›
Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the di-
rection of arrow
5
.
Close the flap
›
Lift the bonnet.
›
Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it.
›
Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm –
do not push it in.
WARNING
■
Check that the bonnet is closed properly.
■
If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving, stop the
vehicle immediately and close the flap – risk of accident!
■
Make sure that when closing the bonnet lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
CAUTION
Never open the bonnet by the locking lever » Fig. 117.
Engine compartment overview
Fig. 118 Principle sketch: Engine compartment
Read and observe and on page 137 first.
Arrangement in the engine compartment » Fig. 118
Coolant expansion reservoir 143
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 139
Engine oil dipstick 141
Engine oil filler opening 142
Brake fluid reservoir 144
Vehicle battery 144
Note
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical.
Radiator fan
Read and observe and on page 137 first.
The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor. Operation is controlled ac-
cording to the temperature of the coolant.
WARNING
After switching off the ignition, the fan may intermittently continue to op-
erate for approx. 10 minutes.
Windscreen washer system
Fig. 119
Windscreen washer fluid reser-
voir
Read and observe and on page 137 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir
A
is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 119.
A
B
C
D
E
F
139
Inspecting and replenishing
The cleaning fluid is provided for the cleaning of the front and rear window as
well as the headlight.
The capacity of the reservoir is about 3.5 litres or about 5.4 litres on vehicles
that have a headlight cleaning system
1)
.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head-
lights. We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from
the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories (with antifreeze in winter), which will
remove any stubborn dirt.
In Winter, the washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze even if
the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles.
Under exceptional circumstances, methylated spirits can also be used if no
screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated
spirits must not be more than 15 %. The freeze protection at this concentration
is sufficient only to -5 °C.
CAUTION
■
Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added
to the windscreen washer fluid.
■
If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, only cleaning prod-
ucts which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be
added to the windscreen washer fluid.
■
Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re-
filling, as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system,
leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction.
Engine oil
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Specification 140
Checking the oil level
141
Replenishing
142
The engine has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil that can be use
throughout the year - except in extreme climate zones.
The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development. Thus the in-
formation stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publica-
tion.
ŠKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manu-
facturer. We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a
ŠKODA Service Partner.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated sep-
arately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
The engine oil should be changed after specified service intervals » page 47.
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 137.
CAUTION
Do not pour any additives into the engine oil – risk of serious damage to the
engine parts!
Note
■
Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you en-
gine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle.
■
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■
If your skin has come into contact with oil, it must be washed thoroughly.
Specification
Read and observe
and on page 140 first.
Vehicles with variable service intervals
Petrol engines Specification
1.2 l/55 kW VW 503 00, VW 504 00
1.2 l/63 kW TSI VW 504 00
1.2 l/77 kW TSI VW 504 00
1.4 l/90 kW TSI VW 503 00, VW 504 00
1)
In some countries, 5.4 l. applies for both variants.
140
General Maintenance
Diesel engine
a)
Specification
1.6 l/66, 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00
a)
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
Vehicles with fixed service intervals
Petrol engines Specification
1.2 l/55 kW VW 501 01, VW 502 00
1.2 l/63 kW TSI VW 502 00
1.2 l/77 kW TSI VW 502 00
1.4 l/90 kW TSI VW 501 01, VW 502 00
1.6 l/77 kW VW 501 01, VW 502 00
Diesel engine
a)
Specification
1.6 l/66, 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00
a)
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
CAUTION
■
If the above engine oils are not available, a different engine oil can be used in
an emergency. To prevent damage to the engine, a maximum of 0.5 litres only
of the following engine oils may be used:
■
For petrol engine models: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN, (API SM);
■
for diesel engine models: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Checking the oil level
Fig. 120 Principle sketch: Dipstick
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
The dipstick indicates the engine oil level .
Dipstick » Fig. 120
The oil level must be within this range.
The oil can be checked and topped up, if the following conditions are satisfied.
The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface.
The engine operating temperature is reached.
The engine is turned off.
The bonnet is open.
Checking the level
›
Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
›
Pull out the dipstick.
›
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop.
›
Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
›
Re-insert the dipstick.
The engine consumes a little oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5 l/
1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which
you operate your vehicle. Consumption may be slightly higher than this during
the first 5 000 km.
The oil level must be checked at regular intervals.
In case of low oil level, the display of the instrument cluster shows a check
mark
and the corresponding message » page 36. Check the oil level using
the dipstick as soon as possible. Add oil accordingly.
CAUTION
■
The oil level must never be above the
A
range » Fig. 120 – there is a risk of
damaging the exhaust system!
■
Stop driving if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil
under the current conditions. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a
specialist garage.
■
If the oil level is above the range
A
,
do not continue to drive! Switch off
the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
A
141
Inspecting and replenishing
Replenishing
Read and observe and on page 140 first.
›
Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening » Fig. 118 on page 139.
›
Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct speci-
fications » page 140.
›
Check the oil level » page 141.
›
Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully.
›
Pull the dipstick out as far as the stop.
Coolant
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Checking the coolant level
143
Replenishing
143
The coolant provides cooling for the motor.
It consists of water and coolant additive with additives that protect the cooling
system against corrosion and prevents furring.
The coolant additive level in the coolant must be at least 40%.
The coolant additive may be increased to a maximum of 60%.
The correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive is to be checked if nec-
essary by a specialist garage or is to be restored if necessary.
The description of the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reser-
voir » Fig. 121 on page 143.
WARNING
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 137.
■
The coolant is harmful to health.
■
Avoid contact with the coolant.
■
Coolant vapours are harmful to health.
■
Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
WARNING (Continued)
■
When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir, cover it
with a cloth to protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot
coolant.
■
If any coolant splashes into your eyes, immediately rinse out your eyes
with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
■
Always keep the coolant in the original container, safe from people who
are not completely independent, especially children - there is a danger of
poisoning!
■
If coolant is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
■
Never spill operating fluids over the hot engine - risk of fire.
CAUTION
■
Do not continue if for some reason it is not possible to fill with coolant un-
der the current circumstances! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from
a specialist garage.
■
If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
ventilate - there is a risk of engine damage,
do not continue driving! Switch
off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■
The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under
40%.
■
Over 60% of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protec-
tion and cooling effect.
■
A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specification can
significantly reduce the corrosion protection of the cooling system.
■
Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can con-
sequently result in major engine damage!
■
Do not fill the coolant above the mark
A
» Fig. 121 on page 143.
■
If an error occurs, leading to the engine overheating, the help of a professio-
nal garage is to be sought - there is a risk of serious engine damage occurring.
■
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant.
■
Never cover the radiator - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
142
General Maintenance
Checking the coolant level
Fig. 121
Coolant expansion reservoir
Read and observe and on page 142 first.
The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment.
Coolant expansion reservoir » Fig. 121
Mark for the maximum permissible coolant level
Mark for the lowest permissible coolant level
The coolant level should be kept between the marks
A
and
B
.
The coolant can be checked and topped up, if the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface.
The engine is turned off.
The engine is not heated.
The bonnet is open.
Checking the level
›
Check the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank
» Fig. 121.
If the engine is warm, the test result may be inaccurate. The level can also be
above the mark
A
» Fig. 121.
In case of low coolant level, the warning light
illuminates in the instrument
cluster as well as the relevant notification » page 36 in the instrument cluster.
We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from
time to time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the cooling sys-
tem. Do not merely top up the coolant. Have the cooling system checked by a
specialist garage.
A
B
Replenishing
Read and observe and on page 142 first.
The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of cool-
ant » page 142, in section Introduction.
›
Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the
cap carefully.
›
Replenish the coolant.
›
Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
CAUTION
■
Only top up with new coolant.
■
Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available. In
this case, use just water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and cool-
ant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Brake fluid
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Checking the brake fluid level
144
Specification 144
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment » Fig. 122 on
page 144.
WARNING
■
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 137.
■
Do not use used brake fluid - the function of the brake system may be im-
paired – risk of accident!
CAUTION
■
Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has dropped below the “MIN”
marking » Fig. 122 on page 144, do not continue driving - there is a risk of
an accident! Seek help from a specialist garage.
■
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
143
Inspecting and replenishing
Note
■
The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service.
■
We recommend using brake fluids from the ŠKODA Original Accessories
range.
Checking the brake fluid level
Fig. 122
Brake fluid reservoir
Read and observe and on page 143 first.
The fluid can be checked if the following conditions are met.
The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface.
The engine is turned off.
The bonnet is open.
Checking the level
›
Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir » Fig. 122.
The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-
tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid
level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” mark-
ing.
Too low brake fluid level is indicated by the warning light
being shown on
the display of the instrument cluster as well as the corresponding mes-
sage » page 35,
Brake system.
Specification
Read and observe and on page 143 first.
The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications:
›
VW 50114;
›
FMVSS 116 DOT4.
Vehicle battery
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Opening the cover
145
Checking the battery electrolyte level
146
Charging
146
Replacing
147
Disconnecting and reconnecting
147
Automatic load deactivation
147
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for
the supply of electrical consumers in the car.
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol Meaning
Always wear eye protection.
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
tection.
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced.
Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
144
General Maintenance
WARNING
There is risk of injuries, poisoning, chemical burns, explosions or fire when
working on the battery and on the electrical system. It is essential to com-
ply with the general applicable safety rules as well as the warning instruc-
tions outlined below.
■
Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
pendent, especially children.
■
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a
face shield – risk of blindness!
■
Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
■
The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
with the greatest of care.
■
Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivi-
tis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs.
■
Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and, if it comes into contact with the
skin, causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal.
■
If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the affected
eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor
immediately!
■
Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water.
■
If you swallow battery acid, consult a doctor immediately!
WARNING
■
The use of open flames and light should be avoided.
■
Smoking and radio triggering activities should be avoided.
■
Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
■
Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery – risk of explosion and
chemical burns!
■
Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
■
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
CAUTION
■
Improper handling of the vehicle battery may cause damage.
■
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the paintwork.
■
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge. Prevent the battery from discharging by disconnecting the battery's
negative terminal
or continuously charging the battery with a very low
charging current.
■
Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle bat-
tery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.
■
If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips, the vehicle battery
will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge.
For the sake of the environment
A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste.
These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations.
Note
■
We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
■
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
Opening the cover
Fig. 123
Battery cover
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
The battery is located in the engine compartment.
›
Open the cover in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 123.
The battery cover is installed in reverse order.
145
Inspecting and replenishing
Checking the battery electrolyte level
Fig. 124
Electrolyte level indicator
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator » Fig. 124, the
electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour of this
display.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.
›
Black colour – electrolyte level is correct.
›
Colourless or light yellow colour – electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Vehicles with a START-STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for
checking the energy level for the recurring engine start.
We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist
garage, especially in the following cases.
›
High external temperatures.
›
Longer day trips.
›
After each charge.
Winter time
The vehicle battery only has a proportion of the starting power in lower tem-
peratures. A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures
just below 0 °C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and, if necessary,
recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter.
Note
■
The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part
of the inspection service.
■
For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte
level cannot be checked.
Charging
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.
A charging operation can be performed if the following conditions are satis-
fied.
The engine is turned off.
The ignition is switched off.
All consumers are turned off.
The bonnet is open.
“Fast charging” with high currents
›
Disconnect both battery cables (first of all “negative”, then “positive”).
›
Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red =
“positive”, black = “negative”).
›
Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
›
After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the
mains cable from the power socket.
›
Only then disconnect the charger's terminal clamps.
›
Reconnect the cables to the battery (first “positive”, then “negative”).
Charging with low voltages
It is not necessary to disconnect the cables from the battery if you recharge
the vehicle battery, for example from a mini-charger.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging.
146
General Maintenance
WARNING
■
When you charge a battery, hydrogen is released, and a highly explosive
gas mixture is also produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling
over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is
on.
■
Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery (e.g. with metal ob-
jects - cables) creates a short circuit - risk of damage to the battery, explo-
sion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.
■
Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices.
Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
■
Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the en-
gine, the ignition and all electrical consumers and disconnect the negative
terminal
.
■
“Quick-charging” the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special
charger and specialist knowledge.
■
We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be “rapidly charged” by a
specialist garage.
CAUTION
On vehicles with the START/STOP system, the pole terminal of the charger
must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery,
but only to the engine earth » page 163, Jump-starting using the battery from
another vehicle.
Replacing
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and
size as the original battery. Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased
from a specialist garage.
We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage, where the
new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be
disposed of in accordance with national regulations.
Disconnecting and reconnecting
Read and observe
and on page 145 first.
Disconnecting
›
Switch off the ignition.
›
First, disconnect the negative terminal first, then the positive terminal
of the battery.
Connecting
›
First, connect the positive
first, then the negative
battery terminal.
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func-
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
Function / device Operating measure
Radio or navigation system
Enter code number» User radio
manual or » navigation system
user manual
Time settings » page 33
CAUTION
■
Disconnect the vehicle battery only with the ignition turned off - there is a
risk of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.
■
Under no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly –
risk of a cable fire.
Note
■
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, we recommend
having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality
of all electrical systems is guaranteed.
■
The data of the multi-function display will be reset.
Automatic load deactivation
Read and observe and on page 145 first.
The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from dis-
charging when the battery is put under high levels of strain. This manifests it-
self by the following.
›
The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to
the electrical system.
›
Where necessary, large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and
rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in
the event of an emergency.
147
Inspecting and replenishing
CAUTION
■
Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the
vehicle battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on
a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned
on during longer parking.
■
Consumers that are supplied via a 12-V power socket can cause the vehicle
battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off.
Note
Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated. The driver is
often not aware of it having taken place.
Wheels
Tyres and wheel rims
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Notes on using wheels 148
Tyre pressure 149
Tyre wear 149
Tyre wear indicator and wheels exchange 150
Tyre damage 150
Unidirectional tyres 151
Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by ŠKODA for your mod-
el of vehicle.
WARNING
The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres.
WARNING
For reasons of driving safety, do not replace tyres individually.
For the sake of the environment
Old and unserviceable tyres are classified in a special environmentally hazard-
ous category. These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal reg-
ulations.
Note
■
We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
■
We recommend that you use wheel rims, tyres, full wheel trims and snow
chains from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Notes on using wheels
Read and observe
on page 148 first.
During the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appropriate
care should therefore be taken when driving.
148
General Maintenance
Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels.
Tyre storage
Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be
maintained if the tyres are reassembled.
Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry place that is as dark as possible.
Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.
Tyre age
Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
used. The service life of the tyres is 6 years. Therefore, we recommend not us-
ing tyres that are older than 6 years.
Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
ommend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
WARNING
Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age.
Tyre pressure
Fig. 125 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressures / inflate tyres
Read and observe on page 148 first.
Tyre pressure is always to match the load. The specified tyre pressures are on
a label
A
» Fig. 125.
Sticker with prescribed tyre inflation pressure values » Fig. 125
Position of the CNG label
Inflation pressure for half load
Inflation pressure for increased driving comfort at half load
Inflation pressure for full load
As a result of adjusting pressure to the value
C
for increased driving comfort,
fuel consumption can rise slightly.
Check tyre pressures
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a
month and also before setting off on a long journey.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
higher pressure on warm tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring tyre pressure values are to be stored
every time the tyre pressure changes » page 115.
WARNING
■
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility.
■
Too low or too high inflation pressure impairs handling.
■
If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre will have to overcome a higher
rolling resistance. This will cause a significant increase in the temperature
of the tyre, especially at higher speeds. This can result in tread separation
and a tyre blowout.
■
In the event of very fast tyre inflation pressure loss, such as a sudden tyre
failure, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking.
For the sake of the environment
Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Note
In some countries, the vehicles have a sticker without pictograms.
Tyre wear
Read and observe
on page 148 first.
Tyre wear depends on the pressure, driving style, and other circumstances.
A
B
C
D
149
Wheels
Attention to the following notes may affect tyre wear.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres.
Wheel balance
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. When driving, however, there are a
range of factors that may result in an imbalance. This may become apparent by
a “vibration” in the steering. If this is the case, have the wheels checked by a
specialist garage.
Have the wheels likewise rebalanced after replacing the tyres.
Setting the vehicle geometry
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the
tyres and impairs driving safety. With a distinctive tyre wear, we recommend
that you check the setting of the vehicle geometry in a specialist workshop.
WARNING
■
An incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling.
■
Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged, immediately re-
duce your speed and stop! If no external tyre damage is evident, drive slow-
ly and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle
checked.
Tyre wear indicator and wheels exchange
Fig. 126 Principle sketch: Replace tire tread with wear indicators / wheels
Read and observe on page 148 first.
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the tyres contains has a 1.6 mm high wear indica-
tor » Fig. 126 -
. In some countries, different tyre wear rates may apply.
Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular sym-
bols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
Exchanging the wheels
For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels ev-
ery 10 000 km according to the scheme » Fig. 126-
. You will then obtain ap-
proximately the same life for all the tyres.
After a wheel has been replaced, the tyre pressure has to be adjusted.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor-
ed » page 115.
WARNING
■
You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down.
■
Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface, particularly at
high speeds on wet roads. This could lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled
vehicle movement – “swimming” on a wet road surface).
Tyre damage
Read and observe
on page 148 first.
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis. Remove foreign bodies (e.g.
small stones) from the tyre tread immediately.
Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever
possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres.
WARNING
Never drive with damaged tyres – there is the risk of an accident occurring.
150
General Maintenance
CAUTION
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil, grease
and fuel, which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with these
substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a specialist
workshop.
Unidirectional tyres
Read and observe on page 148 first.
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the
tyre.
The indicated direction of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the
optimal characteristics of these tyres.
These characteristics mainly relate to the following:
›
Increased driving stability.
›
Reduced risk of aquaplaning.
›
Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear.
Manufacturer-approved tyre variants
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Explanation of the tyre labelling
151
Rapid 152
Rapid Green Line 152
Rapid Green tec 152
Approved tyre variants are first to be selected for the model variant (e.g. Rapid
GreenLine), and then selected according to the engine size of your vehicle.
If the model variant of your vehicle cannot be found in the discrete module,
then the approved tyre variants are to be selected according to the engine size
of your vehicle in module » page 152, Rapid.
Only use radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread
pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
The information listed in the table corresponds to the information available at
the time of going to press.
The approved tyre / rim combinations for your car are given on the sales and
technical vehicle documentation.
Explanation of the tyre labelling
Explanation of tyre markings
For example, 225/50R 17 91 Tmeans:
225 Tyre width in mm
50 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
17 Diameter of wheel in inches
91 Load index
T Speed symbol
The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall (possibly on the inside).
For example DOT ... 11 14... means, for example, that the tyre was manufac-
tured in the 11th week of 2014.
The marking M+Smeans that the associated tyre is suitable for winter use.
Load index
The load index indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre.
Load index
83 84 85 86 87 88
Load
(In kg)
487 500 515 530 545 560
Speed symbol
The maximum speed symbol indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed
with fitted tyres in each category.
Speed
symbol
S T U H V W
Maximum
speed
(in km/h)
180 190 200 210 240 270
151
Wheels
WARNING
■
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity of moun-
ted tyres.
■
Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for the mounted tyres.
CAUTION
The information about load index and speed symbol can be found in the vehi-
cle sales and technical documentation.
Rapid
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed symbol
1.2 l./55 kW MPI
175/70 R14 84 T
185/60 R15 84 T
215/45 R16
a)
86 T
215/40 R17
a)
87 T
1.2 l/63 kW TSI
175/70 R14 84 T
185/60 R15 84 T
215/45 R16
a)
86 T
215/40 R17
a)
87 T
1.2 l/77 kW TSI
185/60 R15 84 H
195/55 R15 85 H
215/45 R16
a)
86 H
215/40 R17
a)
87 H
1.4 l/90 kW TSI
185/60 R15 84 H
195/55 R15 85 H
215/45 R16
a)
86 H
215/40 R17
a)
87 H
1.6 l./77 kW MPI
185/60 R15 84 H
195/55 R15 85 H
215/45 R16
a)
86 H
215/40 R17
a)
87 H
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed symbol
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR
185/60 R15 84 H
195/55 R15 85 H
215/45 R16
a)
86 H
215/40 R17
a)
87 H
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR
185/60 R15 84 H
195/55 R15 85 H
215/45 R16
a)
86 H
215/40 R17
a)
87 H
a)
Not valid for the following markets: Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Georgia, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Mol-
dova, Russia, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, and Uzbekistan.
Rapid Green Line
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed symbol
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR 185/60 R15 84 H
Rapid Green tec
Applies only to vehicles with factory installed 15-inch wheels.
Motorisation
Tyre
size
Minimal
Load index
Minimal
Speed symbol
1.2 l/77 kW TSI 185/60 R15 84 H
1.4 l/90 kW TSI 185/60 R15 84 H
1.6 l/66 kW TDI CR 185/60 R15 84 H
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR 185/60 R15 84 H
Winter operation
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Winter tyres 153
Snow chains
153
152
General Maintenance
Winter tyres
Summer tyres have less grip on ice, snow and at temperatures below 7 °C. This
is especially true of vehicles fitted with wide tyres or high-speed tyres.
Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your vehicle when
driving in wintry road conditions.
To get best possible handling, winter tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.
The minimum tread depth must be 4 mm.
Winter tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol) of a lower speed
category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these
tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher.
The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the
menu item Winter tyres » page 47.
Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by ŠKODA for
your model of vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling
properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and reduced tyre wear
on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.
The fuel consumption is also lower.
Snow chains
When driving in wintry road conditions, snow chains improve not only traction,
but also the braking performance.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the follow-
ing wheel/tyre combinations.
Wheel size Depth D Tyre size
5J x 14
a)
35 mm 175/70 R14
6J x 15
b)
38 mm 185/60 R15
6J x 15
b)
38 mm 195/55 R15
a)
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
b)
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 13 mm.
Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains » page 157.
WARNING
Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains.
CAUTION
The chains are to be removed when driving on snow-free paths. They would
otherwise cause loss of performance and damage the tyres.
153
Wheels
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
Emergency equipment
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Placement of the first-aid kit and warning triangle
154
Placement of the reflective vest 154
fire extinguisher 154
Vehicle tool kit 155
Placement of the first-aid kit and warning triangle
Fig. 127
First-aid kit/warning triangle
The following information is for the first aid kit and warning triangle from the
ŠKODA Original accessories valid.
For another first aid kit and warning triangle the storage compartments may
possibly be too small.
First-aid box
The first-aid box can be attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the
boot » Fig. 127.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber
straps » Fig. 127.
WARNING
The first-aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that
they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle
collision which could cause injuries to occupants.
Note
■
Pay attention to the expiration date of the first-aid kit.
■
We recommend using a first-aid kit from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which
are available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Placement of the reflective vest
Fig. 128
Reflective vest
The reflective vest can be stored in a bracket under the driver's seat » Fig. 128.
fire extinguisher
Fig. 129
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driv-
er's seat.
Removing/attaching
›
Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the ar-
row » Fig. 129.
154
Do-it-yourself
›
Remove the fire extinguisher.
›
For mounting, fit the fire extinguisher back into the holder and secure it with
straps.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin-
guisher.
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year.
The national legal requirements must be observed.
WARNING
The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not
come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision
which could cause injuries to occupants.
Note
■
The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements.
■
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. Proper function-
ing of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date.
■
The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only.
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 130 Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is housed in a box in the spare wheel or in the storage
space for the spare wheel.
Depending on the equipment, not all the components listed in the on-board
tool kit have to be contained in it.
Screwdriver
Key for removing and installing the tail light
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
Towing eye
Clamps for removing the wheel trims
Depending upon vehicle equipment: Jack with sign / puncture repair kit
Wheel wrench
Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps
Replacement bulb set
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads.
CAUTION
■
Screw the jack back into the starting position before storing in the box with
the tool kit.
■
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot.
■
Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Reserve and temporary spare wheel
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Remove / store wheel 156
Spare wheel
156
When using an emergency or spare wheel make sure to mount a wheel with
the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible.
After changing the spare wheel, the tyre pressure should be adjusted. In vehi-
cles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stor-
ed » page 115.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
155
Emergency equipment and self-help
WARNING
■
If, in the case of puncture occurring, the spare tyre with a non-bound di-
rection or an opposite direction of rotation must be mounted, then drive
carefully. The best properties of the tyre are no longer present in this situa-
tion.
■
If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted
to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used
briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of
driving is adopted.
■
If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the
fitted tyres, never drive faster than 80 km/h (or 50 mph).
■
Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged.
Remove / store wheel
Fig. 131
Taking the wheel out
Read and observe on page 156 first.
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is
fixed in place with a special bolt » Fig. 131.
Take out the wheel
›
Open the boot lid.
›
Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment.
›
Loosen the belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
›
Unscrew the nut in direction of arrow » Fig. 131.
›
Take out the wheel.
Stow the wheel
›
Place the wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing down-
ward.
›
Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
›
Screw on the nut in the opposite direction to the arrow » Fig. 131 until the
wheel is safely secured.
›
Place the box with the tool kit back into the spare wheel and secure it with
the tape.
›
Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
›
Close the boot lid.
Spare wheel
Read and observe on page 156 first.
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel.
Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
›
The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
›
Be particularly observant when driving.
›
The temporary spare wheel is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for
the vehicle » page 149.
›
Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage,
since it is not intended for permanent use.
WARNING
■
Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted!
■
Only use the temporary spare wheel when absolutely necessary.
■
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
■
The snow chains cannot be used on the temporary spare wheel.
■
Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare
wheel.
Changing a wheel
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Preliminary work 157
Full wheel trim 157
Wheel bolts 157
Changing a wheel 158
Follow-up work 158
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts 158
156
Do-it-yourself
Raising the vehicle 159
Anti-theft wheel bolts 160
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, the following instruc-
tions must be observed before changing a wheel on the road.
Switch on the hazard warning lights system.
The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed distance - observe
the national legal provisions when doing so.
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic.
Choose a location with a flat, solid surface.
Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while
the wheel is being changed.
The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently fit-
ted with tyres or rims that differ from the factory-fitted ones » page 151, Ex-
planation of the tyre labelling.
The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel.
Preliminary work
Before changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
›
Switch off the engine.
›
Engage the 1st gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission
in the P-position.
›
Firmly apply the handbrake.
›
Uncouple any trailers.
›
Remove the vehicle tool kit » page 155 and the spare wheel » page 155 from
the boot.
Full wheel trim
Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel cover.
Extracting
›
Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit » page 155 into the reinforced
edge of the wheel trim.
›
Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
Installing
›
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve open-
ing » .
›
Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
CAUTION
Notes from the factory or from the ŠKODA Original accessory delivered trim..
■
When using an anti-theft wheel bolt, make sure that this has been fitted ac-
cording to the position marked on the back of the wheel cover position.
■
On the back of the wheel cover, the position for the anti-theft wheel bolt is
marked by means of a symbol. If the wheel cover is set outside the position
marked for the anti-theft wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel
cover.
CAUTION
■
Use the pressure of your hand only, do not strike the full wheel trim. The
cover could be damaged.
■
If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order to
cool the brake system.
Note
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheel bolts
Fig. 132
Remove the cap
Before removing the wheel bolts, remove the covering caps.
Extracting
›
Push the extraction pliers » page 155 sufficiently far onto the cap until the
inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap.
›
Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 132.
157
Emergency equipment and self-help
Installing
›
Push the cap onto the wheel bolt up to the stop.
Changing a wheel
When changing a wheel, the following instructions must be followed.
›
Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
›
First of all slacken the anti-theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts.
›
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the
ground.
›
Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
›
Remove the wheel carefully.
›
Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
›
Lower the vehicle.
›
Alternately tighten wheel bolts opposite (diagonally) with the wheel wrench.
Tighten the anti-theft wheel bolt last.
›
Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is cor-
rect » page 151.
WARNING
■
Undo the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) provided that the vehi-
cle has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could become loose
and fall off.
■
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
■
If it is established when changing a wheel that the wheel bolts are corro-
ded and difficult to move, then these must be replaced.
■
Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts!
Follow-up work
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
›
Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special
screw » page 155.
›
Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band.
›
Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible.
›
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque
wrench as soon as possible.
After changing the wheel, the tyre pressure should be adjusted. In vehicles
with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values are to be stored » page 115.
Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair op-
tions.
WARNING
Information on the wheel bolts
■
The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light al-
loy wheels is 120 Nm.
■
If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
can come loose when the car is moving. A tightening torque which is too
high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent
deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.
■
In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving.
■
Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque
has been checked.
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 133
Changing a wheel: Loosening the
wheel bolts
Before removing the wheel bolts, the caps for the wheel bolts must be pulled
off.
Release
›
Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop
1)
.
1)
Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 160.
158
Do-it-yourself
›
Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction
of the arrow » Fig. 133.
Tightening
›
Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop
1)
.
›
Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt against the direction of the
arrow » Fig. 133 until it is tight.
After tightening the wheel bolts, the covering caps must be replaced.
WARNING
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
make sure you keep your footing.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 134
Jacking points for positioning
lifting jack
Fig. 135 Attach lifting jack
In order to raise the vehicle, the jack from the tool kit is to be used.
Position the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre .
The mounting points are located on the metal bar of the lower sill on the un-
derside of your vehicle. The positions of these are embossed by means of
markings on the side surface of the lower sill » Fig. 134.
›
Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking
point » Fig. 135 -
.
›
Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up
until its claw encloses the web » Fig. 135 -
.
›
Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the
ground.
WARNING
Notes for vehicle lifting
■
Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle.
■
If the wheel has to be changed on a slope, first of all block the opposite
wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpect-
edly rolling away.
■
Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent
possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move
the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always nec-
essary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable
base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth,
such as cobbled stones, tiled floor, etc.
■
Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur-
pose.
■
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■
Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs under the vehicle,
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
■
When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the web of the
lower fork leg, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle occurring.
1)
Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 160.
159
Emergency equipment and self-help
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 136
Principle sketch: Anti-theft
wheel bolt with adapter
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. These can only be
loosened or tightened with the use of adapter
B
» Fig. 136.
›
Remove the full wheel trim or the caps of the wheel bolts.
›
Insert adapter
B
» Fig. 136 with the toothed side all the way into the inner
teeth in the head of the anti-theft wheel bolts
A
.
›
Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter
B
up to the stop.
›
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt » page 158.
›
Remove the adapter.
›
Replace the wheel trim or the caps.
To be equipped for a possible wheel change, the adapter for the anti-theft
wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle. The adapter is stowed in the
tool kit.
Note
■
Note the code number which is embossed both on the adapter and also on
the end of each anti-theft wheel bolt. This number can be used to purchase a
replacement adapter from ŠKODA Genuine Parts if required.
■
The anti-theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a ŠKODA
Partner.
■
The position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is marked on the back of the wheel
cover with every ŠKODA supplied original equipment hub cap or directly at the
factors. When using an anti-theft wheel bolt, make sure that this has been fit-
ted according to the position marked on the back of the wheel cover position.
Puncture set
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Components of the puncture repair kits
161
General information 161
Preparations for using the breakdown kit 161
Sealing and inflating the tyre 162
Notes for driving with tyre repaired 162
Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies
or a puncture with diameters up to approx. 4 mm.
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma-
nent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga-
rage.
The wheel must not be removed during repair.
Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
WARNING
■
The sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
■
Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
For the sake of the environment
Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in
accordance with environmental protection regulations.
Note
■
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Parts.
■
Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit, or
consult a specialist garage about repair options.
160
Do-it-yourself
Components of the puncture repair kits
Fig. 137 Principle sketch: Components of the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 160 first.
Components of the set » Fig. 137
Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Valve remover
Inflation hose with plug
Air compressor
Button for releasing the tyre pressure
12 volt cable connector
Tyre inflation hose
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
ON and OFF switch
Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve core
The valve remover
2
has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. This contains a sealing means and an air compressor.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
General information
Read and observe on page 160 first.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, the following instruc-
tions must be observed before carrying out a wheel repair on the road.
Switch on the hazard warning lights system.
The warning triangle must be set up at the prescribed distance - observe
the national legal provisions when doing so.
Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic.
Choose a location with a flat, solid surface.
Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance) while
the wheel is being changed.
The national legal requirements must be observed when repairing a tyre.
The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances.
›
The rim is damaged.
›
The outside temperature is below -20 ° C.
›
The cut or puncture is larger than 4 mm.
›
The tyre wall is damaged.
›
The result will be to drive with very low tyre pressure or with a completely
flat tyres.
›
After the expiration date (see inflation bottle).
Preparations for using the breakdown kit
Read and observe
on page 160 first.
The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the puncture
repair kit.
›
Switch off the engine.
›
Engage the 1st gear or place the selector lever of the automatic transmission
in the P-position.
›
Firmly apply the handbrake.
›
Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit » page 161,
General information.
›
Remove the breakdown kit from the boot.
›
Stick the sticker
1
» Fig. 137 on page 161 on the dashboard in the driver's
field of view.
›
Unscrew the valve cap.
161
Emergency equipment and self-help
›
Use the valve remover
2
to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean
surface (rag, paper, etc.).
Sealing and inflating the tyre
Read and observe on page 160 first.
Sealing
›
Forcefully shake the tyre inflater bottle
10
» Fig. 137 on page 161 back and
forth several times.
›
Firmly screw the inflation hose
3
onto the tyre inflator bottle
10
in a clock-
wise direction. The film on the cap is pierced automatically.
›
Remove the plug from the inflation hose
3
and plug the open end fully onto
the tyre valve.
›
Hold the bottle
10
with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
›
Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve.
›
Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover
2
.
Inflating
›
Screw the tyre inflation hose
7
» Fig. 137 on page 161 of the air compressor
firmly onto the tyre valve.
›
Start the engine and run it in idle.
›
Plug the connector
6
into 12 Volt socket » page 76, 12-Volt power outlet.
›
Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch
9
.
›
Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved.
Maximum run time of 8 minutes » .
›
Switch off the air compressor.
›
If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
hose
7
from the tyre valve.
›
Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
to “distribute” in the tyre.
›
Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose
7
back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
›
If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this
means the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre
with the breakdown kit » .
›
Switch off the air compressor.
›
Remove the tyre inflation hose
7
from the tyre valve.
Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar is achieved, continue the journey
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
■
If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage
sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the
tyre.
Do not drive the vehicle. Seek help from a specialist garage.
■
The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be-
ing inflated – there is a risk of burning.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest – there is a
risk of overheating. Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before
switching it on again.
Notes for driving with tyre repaired
Read and observe on page 160 first.
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
minutes.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less
›
Do not continue to drive! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the
breakdown kit.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more
›
Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value.
›
Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
■
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a stand-
ard tyre.
■
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
■
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
Jump-starting
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
163
162
Do-it-yourself
The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump-start your vehicle if the en-
gine will not start because the battery is flat.
WARNING
■
Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the en-
gine compartment » page 137.
■
A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not jump start with the battery of an-
other vehicle – there is a risk of explosion.
■
Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes, etc.)
away from the battery – risk of explosion!
■
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels – risk of
explosion and chemical burns.
■
The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
Note
We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
Fig. 138
Jump-starting: A – flat battery, B
– battery providing current
Fig. 139 Engine earth: START-STOP system
Read and observe on page 163 first.
The starting process using the battery of another vehicle requires the use of
jumper cables.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
›
Attach clamp
1
to the positive terminal of the discharged battery
A
» Fig. 138 .
›
Attach clamp
2
to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power
B
.
›
Attach clamp
3
to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power
B
.
›
Attach the clamp
4
to a solid metal component firmly connected to the en-
gine block or to the engine block itself.
Starting engine
›
Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
›
Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
›
If the engine does not start, halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec-
onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process.
›
Remove the jumper cables exactly in the reverse sequence as for clamping.
On vehicles with the START-STOP system, the jump-start cable of the charger
must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery,
but only to the engine earth.
›
1.2 l/63 kW TSI and 1.2 l/77 kW TSI engines » Fig. 139 -
›
1.4 l/90 kW engine » Fig. 139 -
›
1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR engine » Fig. 139 -
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the bat-
tery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of
the discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps. Observe the instructions of the jumper lead manu-
facturer.
Positive cable – colour coding in the majority of cases is red.
Negative cable – colour coding in the majority of cases is black.
163
Emergency equipment and self-help
WARNING
■
Do not clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being star-
ted.
■
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – there is a risk of short circuit.
■
The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle
– there is a risk of short circuit.
■
Route the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotat-
ing parts in the engine compartment.
■
There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise cur-
rent may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
Towing the vehicle
Introduction
Fig. 140
Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front towing eye 165
Rear towing eye 165
Vehicles with a tow hitch 165
For towing a braided tow rope is to be used » Fig. 140-
.
When towing, the following guidelines must be observed.
Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front or rear wheels raised.
Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the auto-
matic gearbox is damaged!
Driver of the tow vehicle
›
Engage the clutch gently when starting off or depress the accelerator partic-
ularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
›
Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Driver of the towed vehicle
›
Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that
the turn signal lights, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can
be used.
›
Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. If the engine is not running, significantly more physical force
is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle.
If using a tow rope, ensure that it is always kept taught.
Both drivers should be familiar with the problems which might possibly occur
while a vehicle is being towed. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in
another vehicle or to be towed in.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it
is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing dis-
tance is greater than 50 km.
WARNING
■
When towing, respect the national legal provisions, especially those
which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle be-
ing towed.
■
When towing, exercise increased caution.
■
For towing no spiral tow rope is to be used » Fig. 140-
, the towing eye
may unscrew out of the vehicle - there is a risk of accidents.
■
The tow rope should not be twisted - there is a risk of accidents.
164
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
■
Do not tow start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid » page 162, Jump-starting.
■
If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, your vehicle must only be towed
with the front axle raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or
trailer.
■
To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should
be elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a
similarly elastic material.
■
There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the
points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
■
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes » page 165
or » page 165 to the detachable ball head of the towing equip-
ment » page 116.
Note
We recommend using a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories, which is
available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Front towing eye
Fig. 141 Removing the cap/installing the towing eye
Read and observe
and on page 164 first.
Removing/installing the cap
›
Press on the cap in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 141.
›
Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow
2
.
›
After unscrewing the cap of the towing eye, insert the cap in the region of
the arrow
1
and then press the opposite side of the cap.
The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
›
Manually screw the towing eye as far as it will go in the direction of the ar-
row
3
» Fig. 141» .
For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel
wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed
through the eye.
›
Unscrew the towing eye against the direction of the arrow
3
.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, oth-
erwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Rear towing eye
Fig. 142
Rear towing eye
Read and observe and on page 164 first.
The rear towing eye is located below the bumper on the right.
Remove the protective cap before using the towing eye. » Fig. 142. Replace the
protective cap after using the towing eye.
Vehicles with a tow hitch
Read and observe and on page 164 first.
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the pre-installed detachable
tow-bar may be used » page 116, Hitch.
Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to
using the towing eye.
165
Emergency equipment and self-help
CAUTION
The detachable ball rod and/or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable
tow bar is used.
Remote control
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
166
Synchronising the remote control 166
CAUTION
■
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
■
We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a ŠKODA
service partner.
■
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions.
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
Fig. 143 Remove cover/take out battery
Read and observe
on page 166 first.
The battery change is carried out as follows.
›
Flip out the key.
›
Press off the battery cover
A
» Fig. 143 with your thumb or using a flat
screwdriver in the region of the arrows
1
.
›
Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in
the region of the arrow
2
.
›
Insert the new battery.
›
Insert the battery cover
A
and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the remote control key after replacing the battery » page 166.
Note
If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat-
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
Synchronising the remote control
Read and observe on page 166 first.
If the vehicle does not unlock when pressing the remote control, the key may
not be synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the remote control
key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the
equipment or the battery in the remote control key has been replaced.
Synchronise the key as follows.
›
Press any button on the remote control key.
›
Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Emergency unlocking/locking
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Locking the door without a locking cylinder 167
Unlocking the tailgate 167
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 167
166
Do-it-yourself
Locking the door without a locking cylinder
Fig. 144 Emergency locking: Left/right rear door
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors
which have no locking cylinder, it is only visible after opening the door.
›
Remove the cover
A
» Fig. 144.
›
Insert the vehicle key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow
(sprung position).
›
Replace the cover
A
.
Unlocking the tailgate
Fig. 145
Emergency unlocking of the boot
lid
The boot lid can be unlocked manually in an emergency.
›
Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel » Fig. 145 as far as it will
go.
›
Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
›
Open the boot lid.
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Fig. 146
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
›
Firmly apply the handbrake.
›
With one hand on the edge of the cover, push in direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 146.
›
At the same time lift the cover on the selector lever gaiter with the other
hand in direction of arrow
2
.
›
With one finger, push the yellow plastic element in the direction of arrow
3
down to the stop.
›
At the same time, press the locking button in the selector lever and move
the selector lever to position N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
168
Replacing the rear window wiper blade 168
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
167
Emergency equipment and self-help
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 147 Windscreen wiper blade
Read and observe
on page 167 first.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms
into the service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
›
Closing the bonnet.
›
Switch the ignition on and off again.
›
Place the operating lever in position
4
» page 66, Activating the windscreen
wipers and washers.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the service position.
Removing the wiper blade
›
Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of
1
» Fig. 147.
›
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
›
Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and press the securing mechanism
A
in the direction of arrow
2
.
›
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
›
Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place.
›
Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
›
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
›
Turn on the ignition and press the lever into position
4
» page 66, Activat-
ing the windscreen wipers and washers.
The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 148 Rear window wiper blade
Read and observe
on page 167 first.
Removing the wiper blade
›
Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of
1
» Fig. 148.
›
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
›
Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and press the securing mechanism
A
in the direction of arrow
2
.
›
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
›
Push the windscreen wiper blade to the stop until it locks into place.
›
Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
›
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
168
Do-it-yourself
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fuses in the dash panel 169
Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel 170
Fuses in the engine compartment 171
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 171
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses.
Switch off the ignition and the corresponding power consuming device before
replacing a fuse.
Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat-
ing » page 170, Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel or » page 171,
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment.
Fuse colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
dark brown 7.5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
white 25
green 30
orange 40
WARNING
Always read and observe the warning notes before completing any work in
the engine compartment » page 137, Engine compartment.
CAUTION
■
“Never repair” fuses, and do not replace them with fuses of a higher amper-
age – risk of fire! This may also cause damage at other points in the electrical
system.
■
A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip. Replace the faulty
fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
■
If a newly inserted fuse burns through again, then a specialist should be con-
sulted immediately.
Note
■
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. A box of
replacement fuses can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■
There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse.
■
Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device.
Fuses in the dash panel
Fig. 149
Remove the fuse box cover.
Read and observe and on page 169 first.
The fuses are located on the bottom of the dash panel behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
›
Grip the fuse box cover at point
A
and take-out in the direction of ar-
row » Fig. 149.
›
Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dash
panel.
›
Place the clip on the respective fuse and pull this fuse out.
›
Insert a new fuse.
›
Replace the clamp in the original position.
›
Insert the top edge of the cover into the dash panel first.
Carefully push the cover in.
169
Fuses and light bulbs
Assignment of the fuses in the dash panel
Fig. 150 Schematic representation of the fuse box for vehicles with left-
hand steering/right-hand steering
Read and observe
and on page 169 first.
No. Power consumer
1 S-contact
2 START - STOP
3
Instrument cluster, headlight range adjustment, telephone, oil level
sensor, diagnostic port, dimmable interior rear-view mirror
4 Control unit for ABS/ESC, steering angle sensor strip with switches
5 Petrol engine: Speed regulating system
6 Reversing light (manual gearbox)
7 Ignition, engine control unit, automatic gearbox
8 Brake pedal switch, clutch switch, engine cooling fan
9
Operating controls for the heating, electronic control unit for air con-
ditioning system, park distance control, window lift, engine cooling
fan, heated washer nozzles
10 DC-DC converter
11 Mirror adjustment
12 Control unit for trailer detection
13
Electronic control unit for automatic gearbox, selector lever of the
automatic gearbox
14 Headlight range control
15 Not assigned
No. Power consumer
16
Power steering, speed sensor, engine control unit, control unit for
fuel pump
17 Daytime running lights/radio for vehicles with START-STOP
18 Mirror heater
19 Ignition lock input
20 Engine control unit, electronic control unit for fuel pump, fuel pump
21
Reversing lamp (automatic gearbox), fog lights with the function
CORNER
22
Operating controls for the heating, electronic control unit for air con-
ditioning system, telephone, instrument cluster, steering angle
sender, multi-function steering wheel, ignition key removal lock, di-
agnostic port, rain sensor
23
Interior lighting, storage compartment and luggage compartment,
side lights
24 Central control unit
25 Light switch
26 Rear window wiper
27 Operating lever underneath the steering wheel
28 Petrol engine: Purge valve, PTC heater
29 Injection, coolant pump
30 Fuel pump, ignition system, cruise control
31 Lambda probe
32 High-pressure fuel pump, control valve for fuel pressure
33 Engine control unit
34 Engine control unit, vacuum pump
35 Switch illumination, number plate light, parking light
36 High beam, light switch
37 Rear fog light, DC-DC converter
38 Fog lights
39 Air blower for heating
40 Not assigned
41 Heated front seats
42 Rear window heater
170
Do-it-yourself
No. Power consumer
43 Horn
44 Windscreen wipers
45 Boot lid lock, central locking system
46 Alarm
47 Cigarette lighter
48 ABS
49 Turn signal lights, brake lights
50 DC-DC converter, radio
51 Electric windows (driver's window and rear left window)
52 Electric windows (front passenger's window and rear right)
53 Windscreen washer
54
START-STOP instrument cluster, operating lever under the steering
wheel, multifunction steering wheel
55 Control unit for automatic gearbox
56 Headlight cleaning system
57 Headlights front, rear
58 Headlights front, rear
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 151 Vehicle battery: Cover for the fuse box - variant 1 / variant 2
Read and observe and on page 169 first.
Replacing fuses
›
Press together the interlocks of the cover simultaneously in the direction of
the arrow
1
» Fig. 151.
›
Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow
2
.
›
Replace the appropriate fuse.
›
Place the cover on top of the fuse box.
›
Push in the interlocks on the cover and lock.
The cover must engage securely.
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment
Fig. 152
Fuses
Read and observe and on page 169 first.
No. Power consumer
1 ABS
2 Radiator fan
3 Automatic gearbox
4 ABS
5 Central control unit
6 Electrical auxiliary heating system
171
Fuses and light bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Bulb arrangement in the headlights
172
Replacing the high beam bulb (halogen headlights) 173
Replacing bulb for main beam, daytime running lights and parking light 173
Changing the front turn signal bulb 174
Replacing the bulb for the fog light 174
Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 175
Rear Light 175
Replacing bulbs in rear light 176
Some manual skills are required to change a bulb. For this reason, we recom-
mend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help
in the event of any uncertainties.
›
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
›
Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
›
A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in
the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot.
WARNING
■
Always read and observe the warning notes before completing any work
in the engine compartment » page 137.
■
Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul-
ty by other road users.
■
H7 and H15 bulbs are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb -
risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
■
Gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, professio-
nal knowledge is required – risk of death!
■
Switch off the respective vehicle light when changing the bulb.
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
Note
■
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos-
sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■
We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the ve-
hicle. Replacement bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODAOriginal Accessories.
■
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the main, low or fog beam.
■
In case of failure of a xenon gas discharge lamp or an LED diode, visit a spe-
cialist garage.
Bulb arrangement in the headlights
Fig. 153
Principle sketch: Headlights
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
Bulb arrangement » Fig. 153
Low beam or low beam with xenon gas discharge lamp
Main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light
Turn signal light (at the front)
A
B
C
172
Do-it-yourself
Replacing the high beam bulb (halogen headlights)
Fig. 154 Changing the bulb for the low beam
Read and observe
and on page 172 first.
›
Remove the protective cap
A
» Fig. 153 on page 172.
›
Remove the socket with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 154.
›
Remove the connector.
›
Insert the connector with the new bulb in the direction of arrow
2
so that
the fixing lug
A
fits the bulb into the recess on the reflector.
›
Attach the connector.
›
Fit the protective cap
A
» Fig. 153 on page 172.
Replacing bulb for main beam, daytime running lights and parking
light
Fig. 155
Replacing the bulb for main
beam and separate daytime run-
ning lights
Fig. 156 Change the light bulb for the parking light
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
Removing/replacing the bulb for main beam and separate daytime running
lights
›
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 153 on page 172.
›
Pull the holder until it stops in the arrow direction
1
» Fig. 155.
›
Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
›
Change the bulb in the socket.
›
Insert the socket with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
›
Turn the socket with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
›
Fit protective cap
B
» Fig. 153 on page 172 Insert.
Removing/replacing the bulb for the parking light
›
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 153 on page 172.
›
Remove the bulb holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the
arrow
1
» Fig. 156.
›
Grasp the lamp socket at the places marked by arrows.
›
Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
2
.
›
Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder up to the stop.
›
Replace the bulb holder in the headlamp with the bulb.
›
Fit protective cap
B
» Fig. 153 on page 172 Insert.
173
Fuses and light bulbs
Changing the front turn signal bulb
Fig. 157
Changing the bulb for the front
turn signal light
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
›
Turn the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 157.
›
Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
›
Change the bulb in the socket.
›
Insert the socket with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
›
Turn the socket with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Replacing the bulb for the fog light
Fig. 158 Remove the number plate light / replace the bulb
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
Remove the protective grille and headlight
›
Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel covers » page 155, Vehicle tool
kit into opening
A
» Fig. 158.
›
Loosen the protective grille by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow
1
.
›
Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow
2
.
›
Unscrew the screws
B
with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
›
With the key
2
» page 155, Vehicle tool kit unlock the locking
C
in direction
of arrow
3
.
›
Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow
4
.
Replacing the light bulb
›
Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow
5
.
›
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
6
.
›
Pull the lamp holder until it stops in the arrow direction
7
.
›
Remove the lamp holder in the direction of the arrow
8
.
›
Insert the new bulb into the headlight and turn counter to the direction of
arrow
7
as far as the stop.
174
Do-it-yourself
›
Attach the connector.
Refit the headlight and grille
›
Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow
4
» Fig. 158 and tightening.
›
Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in.
The protective grille must engage firmly.
Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light
Fig. 159
Remove the number plate light/replace the bulb
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
›
Open the boot lid.
›
Push in the lamp in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 159.
The lamp comes loose.
›
Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow
2
and remove it.
›
Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
›
Insert a new bulb into the holder.
›
Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
.
›
Push on the light until the spring clicks into place.
Check that the light is securely inserted.
Rear Light
Fig. 160
Remove light / pull out connector
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
Removing
›
Open the boot lid.
›
Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel covers » page 155, Vehicle tool
kit into opening
A
» Fig. 160.
›
Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow
1
.
›
Unscrew the screws
B
with the key from the tool kit.
›
Grasp the lamp and carefully remove in the direction of arrow
2
.
›
Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow
3
.
›
Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction
of the arrow
4
.
Fitting
›
Insert the bulb holder into the lamp.
The lock on the plug must be inserted securely.
›
Insert the lamp with the pin
B
» Fig. 161 on page 176 into the recesses
C
» Fig. 160 in the body.
175
Fuses and light bulbs
›
Carefully push the cover in » .
›
Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover.
The cover must engage securely.
CAUTION
■
Ensure that the cable bundle does not become pinched between the body
and the lamp when it is being refitted – risk of damage to the electrical instal-
lation and risk of water ingress.
■
If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched, we recom-
mend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage.
■
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the tail lamp.
Replacing bulbs in rear light
Fig. 161 Outer part of the lamp/inner part of the lamp
Read and observe and on page 172 first.
Outer part of the lamp
›
Rotate the lamp socket
A
» Fig. 161 in direction of arrow
1
and remove in
direction of arrow
2
from the lamp housing.
›
Changing the lamp, reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing
and turn in the opposite direction of the arrow
1
to the stop.
Inner part of the lamp
›
Unlock the bulb holder using the marked area with arrows » Fig. 161 and re-
move the bulb holder from the light.
›
Turn the respective bulb counter clockwise until it stops.
›
Remove the holder from the lamp.
›
Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
›
Insert the bulb holder in the tail lamp assembly.
The lamp holder must engage firmly.
176
Do-it-yourself
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle data
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle characteristics
177
Operating weight and payload 178
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to ECE
Regulations and EU Directives 178
Dimensions
179
Angle 180
Vehicle-specific details per engine type 181
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Vehicle characteristics
Fig. 162 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker » Fig. 162 -
is located on the base of the luggage
compartment and is also stuck into the service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle type
Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
code
Partial vehicle description
Type plate
The type plate » Fig. 162 -
is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Maximum permissible gross weight
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
Engine number
The engine number (three-digit identifier and serial number) is stamped on the
engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci-
dent and damage!
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
177
Technical data
Operating weight and payload
Operating weight
This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional
weight-increasing equipment such as air conditioning system, spare wheel, or
trailer hitch.
The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only.
The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver (75 kg), the weight
of the operating fluids, the tool kit, and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity.
Operating weight of the vehicle » page 181, Vehicle-specific details per en-
gine type.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
›
The weight of the passengers.
›
The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
›
The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
›
The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
›
Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer (max. 50 kg).
Note
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to
ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.
Note
■
The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the ŠKODA websites or in
the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in
accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by legal or techni-
cal rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehi-
cles.
■
Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from
the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commer-
cial and technical vehicle documentation.
178
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 163 Principle sketch: Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 163 Specification Value
A
Height
Basic dimension 1461/1488
a)
Vehicles with an off-road package. 1474/1500
a)
B
Front track
Basic dimension 1457
For vehicles fitted with the 1.2 l/55 kW MPI and 1.2 l/63 kW TSI engines and 14"
wheel rims.
1463
C
Width 1706
D
Rear track
Basic dimension 1494
For vehicles fitted with the 1.2 l/55 kW MPI and 1.2 l/63 kW TSI engines and 14"
wheel rims.
1500
E
Width including exterior mirror 1940
F
Clearance
Basic dimension 136
Vehicles with an off-road package. 143
G
Wheel base 2602
H
Length 4483
a)
Valid for vehicles with the Amundsen+ navigation system.
179
Technical data
Angle
Fig. 164
Principle sketch: Departure an-
gle
Angle » Fig. 164
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
Departure angle
The values shown indicate the maximum incline of an embankment, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without collision of the bumper or under-
body.
The values listed correspond to the maximum axle load, front or back.
Overhang angle (°)
Overhang angle, front Overhang angle, rear
14 12.3
A
B
180
Technical data
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
1.2 l/55 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
55/5400 112/3750 3/1198
Performance and Weights MG5
Top speed (km/h) 175
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 13.9
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1135
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 750
Increases up to 8 % 950
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 560
1.2 ltr./63 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
63/4800 160/1500-3500 4/1197
Performance and Weights MG5
Top speed (km/h) 183
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 11.8
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1155
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 900
Increases up to 8 % 1100
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 570
181
Technical data
1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
77/5000 175/1550-4100 4/1197
Performance and Weights MG6
Top speed (km/h) 195
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.3
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1175
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 1100
Increases up to 8 % 1200
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 580
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
90/5000 200/1500-4000 4/1390
Performance and Weights DSG7
Top speed (km/h) 206
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 9.5
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1230
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 1200
Increases up to 8 % 1200
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 610
182
Technical data
1.6 l/77 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
77/5600 153/3800 4/1598
Performance and Weights MG5 AG6
Top speed (km/h) 193 192
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.6 11.9
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1155 1195
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 1000 1000
Increases up to 8 % 1200 1200
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 570 590
1.6 l./66 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
66/4200 230/1500-2500 4/1598
Performance and Weights MG5 MG5 Green Line DSG7
Top speed (km/h) 184 186 184
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 12.0 12.0 12.2
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1265 1263 1285
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 1200 1000 1200
Increases up to 8 % 1200 1000 1200
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 630 630 640
183
Technical data
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
)
77/4400 250/1500-2500 4/1598
Performance and Weights MG5
Top speed (km/h) 190
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s) 10.4
Operating weight - minimal (kg) 1265
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
Increases up to 12 % 1200
Increases up to 8 % 1200
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 630
184
Technical data
Index
A
abroad
lead-free petrol 135
Abroad
Headlights 63
ABS
Function 109
Warning light 37
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 127
Accessories 124
Adjusting
Belt height
15
Exterior mirror 68
head restraints 70
Interior mirror 67
Seat 69
Steering wheel 10
Adjusting the seats 9
Adjustment
Beam range 58
Air-conditioning system
Air outlet vents 86
Airbag 16
Deactivating 20
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 20
Deployment 16
Front airbag 17
Head airbag 19
Indicator light 39
Modifications and damage to the airbag system 126
Side airbag 18
Airbag system 16
Air conditioning 85
Air distribution control 87
Climatronic 88
manual air conditioning 88
Air distribution control 87
Air outlet vents 86
Alarm
Switching off 53
Triggering 53
Alcantara
cleaning 133
Anti-theft alarm system
Activating/deactivating 54
Trailer 122
Anti-theft wheel bolts 160
Antilock Braking System 109
Armrest
Front 72
Rear 72
artificial leather 133
Ashtray 76
ASR
warning light 37
Assembling the
bar ball, Step 1 118
bar ball, Step 2 118
Assist system
ABS 109
Assist systems 109
ABS 37
ASR 37
Cruise Control System 111
EDL 110
ESC 37, 109
HBA 110
HHC 110
Parking aid 110
START-STOP 112
TCS 109
Audio
see radio / navigation system 4
Auto Check Control 33
Automatic driving lamp control 60
Automatic gearbox 104
Manual shifting of gears 106
Selector lever-emergency unlocking 167
Selector lever lock 105
Starting-off and driving 106
Tiptronic 106
Using the selector lever 105
Automatic gearbox modes 105
Automatic load deactivation 147
automatic transmission
selector lever lock defect 106
Automatic transmission
Kickdown 106
Selector lever lock 105
AUX 97
B
Ball head
Check fitting 119
Ready position 117
Battery
In the remote control key 166
Belts 12
Belt tensioners 15
Bonnet
Closing 138
Opening 138
Boot
Cargo element
83
Class N1 vehicles 84
Double-sided floor covering 84
Hooks 82
See Boot lid 55
Storage compartments 83
Boot cover
Parking position 83
Boot lid
automatic locking 55
Closing 55
Opening 55
185
Index
Brake
information messages 35
warning light 35
Brake booster 103
brake fluid
specification 144
Brake fluid 143
Checking 144
information messages 35
brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
indicator light 41
brakes
Driving in 107
Brakes
Brake booster 103
Brake fluid 144
Braking and stabilisation systems 109
Handbrake 103
Brakes and parking 102
Braking
Information on braking 102
Buttons in the door
Power windows 55
C
Car care
Jack 131
Car computer
See multifunction display
43
Care and maintenance 124
Cargo element 83
Car park ticket holder 74
Carrier
Roof rack 84
Cavity protection 131
Central locking 49
Problems 53
Central locking button 52
Change
Engine oil 140
light bulb in tail light 175
Changing
bulbs 172
Front turn signal bulb 174
Wheels 156
Changing a wheel
Follow-up work 158
Preliminary work 157
Remove and attaching a wheel 158
Charging a vehicle battery 146
Check
Fit ball head properly 119
Checking
Battery electrolyte level 146
Brake fluid 144
Coolant 143
Engine oil 141
Oil level 141
Windscreen washer fluid 139
Checks
Statutory checks 124
Children and safety 22
Child safety
Side airbag 24
Child safety lock 53
Child seat
Classification 24
ISOFIX 25
on the front passenger seat 23
TOP TETHER 26
Use of child seats 24
Use of ISOFIX child seats 25
Chrome parts
see vehicle care 129
Cigarette lighter 75
cleaning
chrome parts 129
Cleaning
Alcantara 133
and maintaining belts 134
artificial leather 133
headlight glasses 130
materials 133
natural leather 132
plastic parts 129
seats covers of the electrically heated seats 134
wheels 131
Cleaning safety
belt 134
Cleaning seat
covers 134
Cleaning the interior
artificial leather 133
Seat covers 134
Cleaning the outside of the vehicle
Decorative films 130
Cleaning the vehicle exterior
Cavity protection 131
Door locking cylinder 131
Headlight glasses 130
Towing device 131
Under-body protection 131
wheels 131
Windows and external mirrors 130
Cleaning vehicle 127
Cleaning vehicle exterior 128
Plastic parts 129
Rubber seals 129
Vehicle paint work 129
Wiper blades 132
Clean interior
Safety belt 134
clean outside of vehicle
chrome parts 129
Climatronic
air distribution control 87
Operating elements 88
186
Index
Clothes hook 79
Cockpit
12-Volt power outlet 76
Ashtray 76
Cigarette lighter 75
General view 29
Lights 63
storage compartments 73
useful equipment 73
COMING HOME 62
compartments 73
Components of the puncture repair kits 161
Computer
See multifunction display 43
convenience turn signal 60
Coolant 142
Checking 143
Indicator light 36
Information messages 36
Replenishing 143
Temperature gauge 32
Cooling system
cost-effective use 89
malfunctions 89
CORNER
See Fog lights with CORNER function 61
Correct seated position 9
Driver 9
Front passenger 10
Instructions 11
Rear seats 11
Counter for distance driven 33
cruise control
operation 111
operation Description 112
Cruise control system
Warning light 41
Cruise Control System 111
Cup holders 74
D
DAY LIGHT
See Daytime running lights 59
Daytime running lights 59
De-icing
windows 130
Deactivating an airbag
20
Decorative films 130
Defrosting rear window 64
Delayed locking of the boot lid
see boot lid 55
Departure angle 180
Diesel
refer to Fuel 136
Diesel fuel
Operation in winter 136
Diesel particulate filter
Information messages 38
Warning light 38
Digital Clock
Time 33
Dipstick 141
Disconnecting and reconnecting
vehicle battery 147
Display 31
Compass points 47
Coolant temperature
32
Fuel supply 32
Gear changes 43
Service intervals 47
Display a low temperature 42
Display of the second speed 33
Disposal
Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 127
Distance driven 33
Door
Child safety lock 53
Closing 51
Emergency locking 167
Opening 51
Warning light door open 36
Door open
Warning light 36
Double-sided floor covering 84
Driving
Driving through water 107
Emissions 178
Fuel consumption 178
Maximum speed 181
off of made-up roads 107
Driving in
Brake linings 107
engine 107
Tyres 107
Driving off of made-up roads 107
Driving through water 107
E
Economical driving
Tips 107
EDL 110
Electrical power windows
Button in the passenger door 56
Buttons in the driver's door 56
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 110
Electronic immobilizer
100
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 109
Emergency
Changing a wheel 156
Hazard warning light system 62
Jump-starting 162, 163
Locking the door without a locking cylinder 167
Selector lever-unlocking 167
Towing the using the tow hitch 165
Towing the vehicle 164
tyre repair 160
Unlocking the tailgate 167
187
Index
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher 154
First-aid kit 154
Jack 155
Reflective Vest 154
Vehicle tool kit 155
Warning triangle 154
emergency wheel 155
Emissions 178
Engine
Switching off the engine 101
Engine compartment 137
Brake fluid 144
Overview 139
Vehicle battery 144
Engine number 177
engine oil
information messages 36
specification 140
Engine oil 140
change 140
Checking 141
Replenishing 142
warning light 36
EPC
Warning light 38
ESC
Function 109
Warning light 37
Exhaust inspection system
Warning light 38
F
Fastening elements 81
Films 130
Fire extinguisher 154
First-aid kit 154
Flashing 60
Fog lights 61
Warning light 40
Fog lights with CORNER function 61
Footmats 104
see footmats 104
Force limit
Power windows 56
Front airbag 17
fuel
lead-free petrol 135
Fuel 134
Diesel 136
Fuel gauge 32
refer to Fuel 134
Refuelling 135
Fuel consumption 178
Fuel reserve
Warning light 39
Fuses
Assignment 169
Assignment of fuses in the dash panel 170
Colour coding 169
Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 171
Replacing 169
Fuses in the engine compartment
Assignment 171
G
Gearbox
Warning messages
33
Gear change
Gear recommendation 43
Information on the selected gear 43
Gear changing
Gear stick 104
gears
spare 156
General view
Cockpit 29
Generator
Indicator light 35
Genuine parts 125
Glasses compartment 78
Glow plug system
Warning light 38
GSM 90
H
Handbrake 103
Warning light 35
Hazard warning light system 62
HBA 110
Head airbag 19
Headlight cleaning system
Headlight cleaning system 66
Headlights
Bulb arrangement 172
Driving abroad 63
Headlight cleaning system 66
Head restraints 70
Adjust height 70
Headrest,
removing and installing 70
Heating 85
Air distribution control 87
Control elements 87
Exterior mirror
68
Rear window 64
Seats 71
Heating rear window 64
HHC 110
Hill Hold Control (HHC) 110
Hitch 116
Accessories 120
Drawback load 116
Hooks 82
Horn 29
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) 110
188
Index
I
Ice scrapers 130
Ignition 101
Ignition lock 101
Immobilizer 100
Indicator lights 34
Individual settings
Locking
52
Unlocking 52
Inertia reels 15
Information system 41
Compass point display 47
Display a low temperature 42
Door warning 43
Gear recommendation 43
MAXI DOT display 46
Multifunction display 43
Operation 42
Service interval display 47
instrument cluster
Auto Check Control 33
Instrument cluster 30
Counter for distance driven 33
Display 31
Display of the second speed 33
Fuel gauge 32
Indicator lights
34
Overview 30
Revolution counter 31
see instrument cluster 30
Speedometer 31
Temperature gauge 32
Interior care 132
Natural leather 132
interior light
Front 63
Interior monitor 54
ISOFIX 25
J
Jack 155
Maintenance 131
Jacking points
Raise vehicle 159
Jump-starting 162, 163
K
Key
Lock 50
Start engine 101
Unlock 50
L
lamp failure
warning lamp 38
lamps
warning lamp 38
Leather
Natural leather care 132
LEAVING HOME 62
Lever
Main beam 60
Turn signal 60
Windscreen wipers 66
lever lock selection (automatic gearbox)
indicator light 41
Light
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 62
Daytime running lights 59
Fog lights with CORNER function 61
Parking light 63
Lighting
Luggage compartment 80
Lights 58
Automatic driving lamp control 60
Beam range adjustment 58
Cockpit 63
Fog lights 61
Hazard warning light system 62
Headlight flasher 60
Indicator lights 34
Low beam 58
Main beam 60
Parking light 58
Rear fog light 61
Replacing bulbs 172
switching on/off 58
Turn signal 60
Lock
Key 50
Lock/unlock steering lock 101
Locking
Individual settings 52
Remote control 50
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the in-
side 52
Locking the door without a locking cylinder
Emergency 167
Low beam 58
Low tyre pressure warning
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 115
Luggage compartment 80
Cover 82
Emergency unlocking 167
Fastening elements 81
Fixing nets 81
Lighting 80
Unlocking the tailgate 167
Luggage compartment cover 82
Luggage compartment lid 54
M
Main beam 60
Warning light 41
Maintenance
see vehicle care 129
189
Index
Manual air conditioning
Air distribution control 87
Operating elements 88
Manual gear changing
see gear changing 104
MAXI DOT
See MAXI DOT display 46
MAXI DOT display 46
Main menu 46
Operation 42
Settings 47
Maximum
permissible weights 177
Maximum speed 181
MDI 97
Mechanical windows 57
open and close 57
Media
see radio / navigation system 4
MFD
See multifunction display 43
Mirror
Exterior mirror 68
Make-up 65
Mobile phone 90
Connecting to the hands-free system 93
Modifications 124
Modifications and technical alterations
Airbags 126
Service 125
Spoiler 126
Multifunction display
Functions 43
Information 45
Memory 44
Operation 42
Multimedia 96
Multimedia holder 77
N
N1 84
Nameplate 177
Navigation system 4
Nets 81
Notes for driving with tyre repaired 162
Notes on using wheels
148
O
oil
information messages 36
Oil
See Engine oil 141
oil pressure
information messages 36
On-board computer
See multifunction display 43
Operating weight 178
Operation in winter
Diesel fuel 136
Vehicle battery 146
Original accessories 125
Outside temperature 45
Overview
Engine compartment 139
Indicator lights 34
P
Parking
103
Parking aid 110
Parking aid 110
Function 111
Parking light 58
Parking space 103
Parking vehicle
Parking 103
Part replacement 124
Passive safety
Before setting off 8
Driving safety 8
Safety equipment 8
Passive Safety 8
Payload 178
Pedals 104
Footmats 104
Petrol
see fuel 135
Plastic parts 129
Pockets on the front seat rests 80
Polishing vehicle paint work
see vehicle care 129
Power outlet
12 V 76
Power steering
Warning light 37
Power windows 55
Practical equipment
12-Volt power outlet 76
Net pockets on the front seat rests 80
Reflective Vest 154
Practical features
Storage pockets on the front seats 79
Waste container 77
Puncture set 160
R
Radiator fan 139
Radio 4
Raise vehicle 159
Rear
interior light 64
Rear fog light 61
Warning light 38
Rear mirror 66
Exterior mirror 68
Interior mirror 67
190
Index
Refuelling 135
Fuel 135
Remote control
Locking 50
Replacing the battery 166
Synchronisation process 166
Unlocking 50
Remote control key
Replacing the battery 166
Removing the
bar ball, Step 1 119
bar ball, Step 2 119
Repairs and technical alterations 124
Replacing
Bulb for main beam, daytime running lights and
parking light 173
Bulb for the fog light 174
Bulb for the licence plate light 175
Bulb in rear light 176
Fuses 169
Fuses in the dash panel 169
Fuses in the engine compartment 171
High beam bulb (halogen headlights) 173
Rear window wiper blade 168
Vehicle battery 147
windscreen wiper blades 168
Replenishing
Coolant 143
Engine oil 142
Windscreen washer fluid 139
Retraction and economical driving 107
Revolution counter 31
Roof
Load 85
Roof rack 84
mounting points 85
Roof load 85
Rubber seals 129
S
SAFE
See Safe securing system 51
SAFELOCK
See Safe securing system 51
Safe securing system 51
Safety
8
Child safety 22
Child safety seats 22
Correct seated position 9
Head restraints 70
ISOFIX 25
TOP TETHER 26
Save electrical energy 107
Save fuel 107
Seals
Vehicle care 129
Seat
Adjusting 69
Seat belt
warning light 35
Seat belts 12
Belt tensioners 15
fastening and unfastening 14
Height adjustment 15
Inertia reels 15
The physical principle of a frontal collision
13
Seat features 71
Seats
Front armrest 72
Head restraints 70
Heating 71
Rear armrest 72
Seat backrests 72
Seats and head restraint 69
Selector lever
Refer to Selector lever 105
Service 125
Service interval display 47
Setting 33
seats and head restraints 69
Setting the 33
Side airbag 18
SmartGate
connection 98
Password 99
Settings 99
Smart Gate
Website 99
Snow chains 153
Spare
change 156
spare wheel 155
change 156
instructions 156
Speedometer 31
See speedometer 31
Speed symbol
See Wheels 151
Spoiler 126
Staring engine
Jump-starting 163
START-STOP 112
Jump-starting 163
Manually deactivating/activating the system 114
Operating conditions of the system 113
operation in vehicles with automatic gearbox 113
operation in vehicles with manual gearbox 113
system-related automatic start-up 114
Start engine 101
Starting engine
Jump-starting 162
START STOP
Information messages 114
Stating and turning off the engine 100
Steering wheel 10
Stopping 103
Storage 73
191
Index
Storage compartment
Glasses compartment 78
in the boot 83
in the centre console 74
in the front arm rest 78
on the front passenger side 78
Storage compartments 73
Storage pockets on the front seats 79
Stowage
compartments in the doors 74
Sun visors 65
Switching off the engine 101
Switch light on/off 58
Switch off ignition 101
Switch on ignition 101
T
Taking care of your vehicle
Automatic car wash system 128
High-pressure cleaner 128
Washing by hand 127
Wash system 128
TCS
Operation 109
Technical data 177
Telephone 90
Tiptronic 106
Tools
155
TOP TETHER 26
Towing 164
Towing a trailer 122
Towing device
Description 116
Operation and maintenance 131
Towing eye
Front 165
Rear 165
Towing protection 54
Traction Control System (TCS) 109
Trailer 121
13-pin socket 121
connection and disconnection 121
Loading 122
Safety eye 121
Towing a trailer 122
Trailer operation 116
Transport
Luggage compartment 80
Roof rack 84
Transporting 73
Transporting children safely 22
Triangle 154
Turn signal 60
Turn signal system
Warning light 40
two-way radio systems 90
Tyre
Damage 150
Explanation of the labelling 151
see wheels 151
Tyre inflation pressure
Warning light 40
Tyre load-bearing capacity
See Wheels 151
Tyre pressure 149
Tyre pressure monitoring 115
Save tyre pressure values 115
Tyre repair
General notes 161
Preparations 161
Pressure test 162
Sealing and inflating the tyre 162
Tyres 148
new 107
Tyre pressure 149
Wear and tear 149
Wear indicators 150
Tyre size 151
see wheels 151
U
Under-body
Vehicle care 131
Under-body protection 131
Unlock
Key 50
Unlocking
Individual settings
52
Remote control 50
Unlocking and locking 49
USB 97
Used vehicles
Acceptance and recycling 127
Useful equipment
Ashtray 76
Car park ticket holder 74
Cigarette lighter 75
Clothes hook 79
Cup holders 74
Glasses compartment 78
Multimedia holder 77
Storage compartment 73
Using the information system 42
Using the selector lever 105
V
Vehicle battery
Automatic load deactivation
147
charging 146
Checking the battery electrolyte level 146
Cover 145
Operation in winter 146
Replacing 147
Safety instructions 144
vehicle care
chrome parts 129
Vehicle care
Alcantara 133
Artificial leather 133
192
Index
Cavity protection 131
Cleaning vehicle exterior 128
Cleaning wheels 131
Decorative films 130
Door locking cylinder 131
Headlight glasses 130
Interior care 132
Maintenance 129
Materials 133
Natural leather 132
Plastic parts 129
Polishing vehicle paint work 129
Rubber seals 129
Safety belt 134
Seat covers 134
Under-body protections 131
washing 127
Vehicle Condition
see Auto Check Control 33
Vehicle data sticker 177
Vehicle data sticker and nameplate
Vehicle data sticker and nameplate 177
Vehicle dimensions 179
Vehicle height 179
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 177
Vehicle length 179
Vehicle tool kit 155
Vehicle width 179
Vest
Placement of the reflective vest 154
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number 177
Visibility 64
Visors
See front sun visors 65
W
Warning at excessive speeds 46
Warning triangle 154
Washing
Automatic car wash system 128
by hand 127
High-pressure cleaner 128
Washing vehicles 127
Waste container 77
Water
Driving through 107
Weather conditions 124
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolts 160
Caps 157
Loosening and tightening 158
Wheel rims 148
wheels
spare wheel 156
Wheels
Age of wheels 148
Changing 156
Driving style 149
Full trim 157
General information 148
Load index 151
Snow chains 153
Speed symbol 151
Storage of wheels 148
Tyre damage 150
Tyre pressure 149
Tyre size 151
Tyre wear 149
Tyre wear indicator 150
Unidirectional tyres 151
Wheel balance 149
Wheels exchange 150
Winter tyres 153
Wi-Fi
Password 98, 99
Settings 99
Website 99
Window
Interior mirror 67
Window wiper
Replacing the rear window wiper blade 168
Windscreen washer fluid
Checking 139
Replenishing 139
Warning light 40
Winter 139
Windscreen washer system 139
Windscreen wipers 66
Windscreen wipers
Activating 66
Replacing the windscreen wipers 168
Windscreen washer fluid 139
Windscreen wipers and washers 65
Winter operation 152
De-icing windows 130
Snow chains 153
Winter tyres 153
Winter tyres
See Wheels 153
Wiper blades 132
Service position of the windscreen wiper arms 168
Wipers
Maintaining wiper blades 132
193
Index
194
Index
Reprinting, reproduction, translation, or any other use, either in whole or in
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s..
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2014
www.skoda-auto.com
You also can do something for the environment!
The fuel consumption of your ŠKODA and the related pollutant
emissions are determined crucially on how you drive.
The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how
you deal with your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual shows you how to use your ŠKODA vehi-
cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco-
nomically at the same time.
Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner's Manual
that are marked below.
Work with us – for the sake of the environment.
Návod k obsluze
Rapid anglicky 11.2014
S56.5610.09.20
5JA012720AF

5JA012720AF
… 158 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Skoda-Rapid---2015

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Skoda Rapid - 2015 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Skoda Rapid - 2015 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 26,81 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Skoda Rapid - 2015

Skoda Rapid - 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 208 pagina's

Skoda Rapid - 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 208 pagina's

Skoda Rapid - 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 208 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info